TEST 1 (UNIT 6)

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. democratic B. gap C. various D. popularity
2. A. trend B. western C. dependent D. material
3. A. typical B. lifestyle C. dye D. rely
4. A. condition B. grandpa C. world D. children
5. A. monk B. opportunity C. oriented D. trend
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Machines can’t ________________ people in this work.
A. repay B. replace C. take over D. restore
7. He used to play with a pop group, but now he is ________________ a solo career.
A. pursuing B. searching C. hunting D. continuing
8. I will just ________________ a note of your name and address.
A. take B. hold C. place D. play
9. Surely a friend should be someone you can ________________ on in difficult times.
A. rest B. believe C. trust D. depend
10. There is no way I can ________________ all these formulas before the test.
A. remind B. record C. memorise D. bear
11. The author gave ________________ reasons for having written the book.
A. various B. similar C. changeable D. multiple
12. Equality between workers and managers is very important in most ________________
workplaces.
A. free B. popular C. democratic D. individual
13. She grew up surrounded by a large ________________ family.
A. expanded B. spread C. lengthened D. extended
14. A(n) ________________ family is a family consisting of two parents and their children.
A. essential B. nuclear C. core D. basic
15. ________________ people tend to focus on family values, draw strength from their family, and
put the needs of the family ahead of their own.
A. Object-oriented B. Profit-oriented C. Family-friendly D. Family-oriented
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
thickness souvenirs fashion interest
foreigners demand footwear soldiers
At the age of 73, the retired shoemaker Pham Quang Xuan says he never thought his tailor-made
rubber sandals would still be popular in modem times. The sandals, made from old car tyres, were
16
worn by many Vietnamese ________________ during the war against the French and the
17
Americans. Mr. Xuan and his friends once made and sold rubber sandals in Hang Bot Street, but
18
________________ dropped as they slowly went out of ________________. Several years ago, he
19
started re-making sandals for friends and family members and, in doing so, helped revive a wartime
________________. Despite his age, he still spends several hours a day carving sandals from rubber of
20
suitable ________________, then cutting and trimming the edges and soles. The sandals come in
either with diagonal or horizontal straps.
IV. Complete the sentences using the correct form of the verb in brackets.
21. Many teenagers admit ____________ for the jobs because their parents ask them ___________
so. (apply - do)
22. “I hope ____________ a doctor.” - “Don’t forget ____________ many biology books.” (become -
read)
23. Employees expect ____________ promotion in their career path. (get)
24. Whatever I do, I attempt ____________ skills that may be useful in my future career. (develop)
25. Nick enjoys ____________ with people to develop his communication skills. (work)
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
26
Recently, everything has changed significantly. In the past, people lived in small and people knew
each other well. If one had 27 ____________, all of his neighbours would help him. In contrast, in these
28
days, people are too busy to think about ____________. Moreover, technology plays an important
29
role in ____________ because people can send a message or make a phone call without visiting
each other.
People in the past worked on farms and travelled everywhere 30 ____________. The kind of food they
ate was natural and not genetically modified. Nowadays, people use cars to travel everywhere.
People do anything faster than in the past by using the machine in workshops or in their jobs. These
 31 32
activities make people become less ____________, and they are likely to ____________ from
heart attack or obesity.
33
The environment before the industrial revolution was ____________ cleaner. However, the
34
population has increased, and human activities have a negative on the environment. We have many
35
factories which throw out ____________ chemicals to cause air pollution and damage the habitat
seriously.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. public B. co-operation C. societies D. communities
27. A. problems B. concerns C. puzzles D. doubts
28. A. other B. others C. another D. the others
29. A. announcement B. delivery C. communication D. notification
30. A. by foot B. on foot C. on their foot D. on their feet
31. A. mobile B. rushing C. restless D. active
32. A. experience B. suffer C. complain D. affect
33. A. so B. much C. more D. very
34. A. impact B. shock C. impression D. contact
35. A. bad B. household C. toxic D. hurtful
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Life in the past and Life at present
Over the last century, there have been many significant changes in the way we live. Obviously, it is
hard to compare life in the past and life of people in the 21 st century because so many changes have
occurred. However, the changes that have taken place over the last ten years are amazing.
To start with, people were not able to travel such long distances in such a short period of time. The
planes were not popular then because they used to be a very expensive means of transport.
Nowadays, we have become very mobile. We have fast and comfortable cars, and more and more
people also travel by plane. Moreover, in the past people had to work much harder as they did not
have equipment which made their work easier. Today, most of the difficult and dangerous work is
done by computers and robots. In the past, living conditions were not as comfortable as they are now.
There were not modern facilities in many households. Besides, many people could not afford
household appliances, such as fridges, TV sets or vacuum cleaners because they used to be luxurious
goods. Another difference between living now and in the past is the fact that nowadays the access to
education is much easier. In the past, there were fewer schools and the quality of education they
provided was much poorer. Nowadays, it is much easier to find educational materials that you need
thanks to the Internet. Another difference is that in the past there were not many sources of
entertainment. Therefore, people used to spend more time with their friends.
It is an obvious conclusion that life has changed significantly in the last couple of years. Life is
definitely much easier now, but it is not easy to decide whether it is also better. The scientific
achievements and technological progress are amazing. We still create new inventions which simplify
our lives. On the other hand, however, life now is much faster and busier than it used to be in the
past. The living standard has definitely improved; however, it is a matter of discussion whether the
quality of our lives is also better.
(Source: Internet)
36. Nowadays, we have become more mobile because ____________.
A. more we travel as much as we can
B. we can travel long distances in a short time
C. planes are still an expensive means of transport
D. we travel everywhere carrying mobile phones
37. Work is not a burden anymore thanks to ____________.
A. modern technology
B. intelligent workers
C. easy work only available
D. no difficult and dangerous work
38. We can infer from the passage that ____________.
A. computers are still expensive
B. people cannot afford necessary household appliances
C. all households have vacuum cleaners
D. households have become more comfortable
39. In education today, ____________.
A. the Internet has become more important
B. people can always choose the best school to follow
C. the quality has been kept as good as that in the past
D. entertainment makes people spend less time with their friends
40. All of the following are true about the changes of life EXCEPT that ____________.
A. the standard of living has significantly improved
B. the scientific achievements and technological progress are marvellous
C. all the changes are positive
D. new inventions have made our lives much easier
VII. Answer the following questions about the changes in learning, using the information in the
table. Then practise the exchanges with your partner.
Past Now
changes in education: mainly teacher-centred education system: more student-
learning styles teachers: the main source of centred, with a focus on interactive
knowledge and information learning and experiential learning teachers:
styles: only memorisation and play a role of facilitators, guiding
repetition students in their learning and
encouraging critical thinking and
creativity
changes in based on a rigid curriculum that have a more diverse and flexible
the curriculum emphasized core subjects, such as curriculum that includes a broader
Maths, Science and Language range of subjects, including Art, Music
and Social Sciences curriculum: also
more personalised, allowing students
to choose their courses and areas of
interest
changes in mainly based on exams and tests that a range of assessment methods that
assessment focused on rote memorisation and focus on a student's overall
rote learning performance, including project-based
assessments, presentations, and so on
changes in relied on traditional methods of Technology: enabled a more
technology communication and teaching, such as interactive and learning experience,
blackboards and textbooks with the use of digital textbooks,
online resources, and virtual learning
 environments
changes in limited to those who could afford it the government provides education to
inclusion and all individuals
diversity
41. What are the changes in learning styles?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
42. What are the changes in the curriculum?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
43. What are the changes in assessment?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
44. What are the changes in technology?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
45. What are the changes in inclusion and diversity?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Write the meaningful sentences about the changes in family, using the cues given below.
46. the family members: my younger sister - entered my junior secondary school, both of us: go to the
same school
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. my father: just retired, follow his interest in gardening (apply hydroponics to his small garden on
the top floor of our house)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. all try to make our house greener: using LED lights, using smart automated devices - turn off
themselves when they are not used
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. also set up solar panels: supply power for bathrooms and lights in our house
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. busy life and computers: made us have less communication between family members; our
parents: ask all members - more sympathetic to one another, offer help when a member needs
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 2 (UNIT 6)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. extended B. oriented C. memorise D. dresses
2. A. mind B. privacy C. lifestyle D. promise
3. A. household B. notes C. convenient D. programme
4. A. promise B. pursue C. personal D. memorise
5. A. freedom B. handsome C. condition D. standard
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. My uncle was never given the ________________ of going to college.
A. luck B. event C. happening D. opportunity
7. Every item we see is made of recycled ________________.
A. stock B. material C. crop D. element
8. The older ________________ tends to have more traditional views.
A. generation B. rank C. peer D. age
9. Before the late 19th century, little attention was paid to women’s ________________.
A. favours B. priorities C. rights D. advantages
10. It is a difficult situation and I don’t know what the ________________ is.
A. password B. answer C. approval D. sign
11. Enjoy the ________________ of the outdoors, where you can do what you want.
A. independence B. freedom C. democracy D. facility
12. Do you have the standard ________________ on the subject?
A. textbook B. handbook C. notebook D. manual
13. This information comes from a very reliable ________________.
A. root B. cause C. beginning D. source
14. Here is a ________________ from her latest film.
A. crew B. roll C. clip D. programme
15. Many important historical ________________ were destroyed when the library was on fire.
A. diaries B. schedules C. documents D. signatures
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
 spirit blossoms flowers respect
market occasion custom habit
Tet (Lunar New Year) activities have more or less changed over time, but beautiful traditional customs
are followed today in every Vietnamese family. For the people, the Tet festival is the time when
16
reality blends with dreams. It is not only a(n) ________________ for them to decorate houses and
17
shop for more goods, but also a chance for family members to reunite and pay ________________
to their ancestors.
Some people have to cut spending due to the current economic difficulties, but none forgets the
18
traditions that symbolise the ________________ of the nation during the holiday. Many young
19
people still follow the traditional ________________ of boiling Chung cakes at home. Jam,
20
cigarettes and wine were essential items during Tet. Peach ________________ are still bought by
every Hanoian family for Tet.
IV. Complete the sentences using the correct form of the verb in brackets.
21. I would like ________________ so that I can earn some spending money. (work)
22. I am starting ________________ for the books that I will need for college. (save)
23. She can’t stand ________________ under such terrible conditions. (work)
24. I can never forget ________________ our team score the winning goal in the final game. (watch)
25. I remember ________________ to the hospital but nothing after that. (take)
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
There have been 26 ________________ changes in the lifestyle of young people a century ago and the
life of teenagers today. Young people a hundred years ago lived in a more 27 ________________ life in
comparison 28 ________________ those of the current times.
Nowadays, communication is done through social media like Facebook, Twitter (X), email addresses,
cell phones and Skype. Television has made entertainment to be easy and interesting. Nearly 80
29
percent of teenagers today have ________________ to television, the Internet, and own at least
one cell phone.
30
In the past, households should be the superior ________________ on their life. But nowadays,
31 32
divorce rates are ________________ high that have ________________ teenagers ignore the
33
concept of family values. Discipline is in teenagers today as compared to young people a century
ago.
 34
In old times, communication was ________________ but today communication is extremely easy
since technology has made the world a small village. Life has really changed, and things are not the
same at all. The more changes are 35 ________________, the harder life becomes.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. unrestricted B. extended C. long-term D. massive
27. A. protected B. protective C. protecting D. protection
28. A. to B. with C. of D. on
29. A. entrance B. introduction C. way D. access
30. A. influence B. control C. rule D. force
31. A. very B. quite C. so D. much
32. A. done B. made C. got D. asked
33. A. flat B. basic C. weak D. low
34. A. smaller B. poor C. moneyless D. empty-handed
35. A. experienced B. continued C. existed D. remained
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
In the past, learning was based on memorisation and lecture-style classes. Teachers were the only
source of knowledge, and students took notes from the blackboard down to their notebooks.
Over the years, the education system has had many changes, with a shift from traditional teaching
styles to more modern methods. Traditional teaching methods like rote learning and memorization
have given ways to more effective methods like project-based learning and online learning.
Project-based learning encourages learners to actively participate in hands-on projects. Instead of
passively listening to lectures in class, students have the opportunity to absorb the content
beforehand through videos or readings. This pre-class preparation allows more interaction, and
students can ask questions and collaborate with their classmates. By engaging with practical
challenges, students gain a deeper understanding of the subject matter and develop crucial problem-
solving skills. The focus shifts from the teacher as the sole source of information to a more dynamic
and interactive learning environment.
Nowadays, online learning has gained remarkable popularity. It offers flexibility and accessibility,
enabling everyone to learn at their own pace and in their preferred environment. With digital
resources, they have the freedom to explore diverse subjects and engage with multimedia content.
Online learning expands the educational horizons by breaking down geographical barriers and
providing a global awareness.
Finally, the goal of effective learning styles is to equip students with the skills they need to succeed in
the 21st century.
(Source: Internet)
36. In the past with lecture-based classes, we can infer that ________________.
A. students wrote notes on the blackboard to remember
B. memorisation helped students not keep notebooks
C. teachers were always right
D. students played an important role in class
37. For the project-based learning method, ________________.
A. students can ask teachers to help them with their projects
B. students have many activities to prepare for their presentation in class
C. students work on the project individually
D. teachers can give students any type of projects
38. Project-based learning helps students ________________.
A. acquire the problem-solving skills
B. become the only source of knowledge
C. work with their peers in other countries
D. not consider projects being challenges anymore
39. All of the following are true about online learning EXCEPT that ________________.
A. students can study at their own speed and choose the websites they like
B. online learning has become more and more popular nowadays
C. lessons contain a variety of multimedia content
D. this method can be only used to learn something about the Internet
40. The phrase ‘breaking down geographical barriers” means.
A. students can travel long distances to meet their peers easily ________________.
B. distances between countries are no longer a big problem for tourists
C. students can interact with their peers in other countries via the Internet
D. students in the world have the same online learning experience
VII. Answer the following questions about the changes in learning, using the information in the
table. Then practise the exchanges with your partner.
Past Now
changes focused on basic sciences more diverse to include sciences, life
in the content skills, and technology
of the lessons
changes relied on memorisation and more interactive and based on
in the learning styles repetition project-based learning
changes in educational tools: limited educational tools: more advanced
educational tools and diverse, contributing to
enriching the educational process
changes in focused on preparing students focus on preparing students for new
educational for traditional jobs fields that require advanced skills
outcomes and abilities
changes in left for technical college or schools: play a more important role
vocational training training centres in guiding students to choose their
future careers and have good
preparation
41. What are the changes in the content of the lessons?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
42. What are the changes in the learning styles?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
43. What are the changes in educational tools?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
44. What are the changes in educational outcomes?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
45. What are the changes in vocational training?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Write the meaningful sentences about the changes in family, using the cues given below.
46. the family members, my elder brother: got into university with scholarship, spend the last two
years of his further education in a well-known university in Australia
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. my father: just got a promotion to become the director of his IT company, much busier and
happier in his new position
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. all try to make our house greener: using efficient appliances (cut the electricity bill in half)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. follow the tendency to sort waste at source: build a sustainable, greener, and cleaner lifestyle in
harmony with nature
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. also apply the 3R’s - reduce, reuse and recycle - to cut down on the amount of waste we throw
away - in particular - collect plastic bottles for recycling, and reuse old jars and pots
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 7. NATURAL WONDERS
OF THE WORLD
A. Pronunciation
● Sounds: /sl/ and /sn/
I. Underline the letters in the following words pronounced the sounds /sl/ or /sn/, and write them
in the correct row.
slang snatch snowman slap sniffle
slowly snowboard snooker sneaky snorkel
sluggish slum snore slender sledge
/sl/:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
/sn/
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
II. Practise reading aloud the following sentences, paying attention to the sounds /sl/ and /sn/.
1. He fell into a deep sleep slowly.
2. You are on a slippery slope when you start lying about your age.
3. They slowly raised the slogan in the march.
4. She sneezed when she was cutting slices of onion.
5. After having a snack, I had a nice snooze on the sofa.
6. The tour guide spoke slowly, but he used some slang - we didn’t understand him.

B. Vocabulary
• Natural wonders
I. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
rainforest access annual destination biodiversity
charming sustainable landscape urgent paradise
1. We must improve the built environment through ________________ design and greener buildings.
2. The average ________________ rainfall in this region is 750 mm.
3. I’m afraid this can’t wait - it really is ________________.
4. The village is ________________ and the surrounding scenery is superb.
5. The Amazon river basin contains the world’s largest tropical ________________.
6. His idea of ________________ is to spend the day lying on the beach.
7. They emphasise the need to conserve the rural ________________.
8. The only ________________ to the village is by boat.
9. The mining project threatens one of the world’s richest areas of ________________.
10. It is the good weather that makes Spain such a popular tourist ________________.
● Word forms
II. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the words given in brackets
1. I have got a lot of ________________ for people who do that sort of work. (admire)
2. The documentary was made on ________________ in the Gobi Desert. (locate)
3. Janet is very interested in historic ________________. (preserve)
4. After a slight ________________, she began to speak. (hesitate)
5. The film takes us on a journey of ________________ to different parts of the globe. (discover)
6. ________________ are working to improve the quality of our lakes and rivers. (environment)
7. The wonderful ________________ of our region’s wildlife is now coming under threat. (diverse)
8. Interest developed in the scientific ________________ of the sea. (explore)
9. Please remember to take all your personal ________________ with you when you leave the
aircraft. (possess)
10. You have to ask for ________________ to leave. (permit)
● Vocabulary for Reading
III. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
area hiking mountain range volcano peak
desert eruptions sand dunes majestic cliff
1. With 43 volcanoes in Indonesia, there have been a total of 184 significant ________________ over
the past 1,700 years.
2. The iconic image of Mount Fuji is often described with a snow-capped ________________.
3. The Gobi is the largest ________________ in Asia and the fifth largest in the world.
4. We flew over the ________________ Grand Canyon.
5. Britain occupies a total ________________ of 88,789 square miles.
6. Lava from the ________________ was flowing down the hillside.
7. People always imagine Gobi as a lifeless sandy desert. In reality, only 5% of the total area are
________________.
8. A(n) ________________ divides the country into western and eastern sides.
9. Keep away from the edge of the ________________ - you might fall .
10. If the weather is fine, we will go ________________ this weekend.
● Prepositions
IV. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. Both their sons are crazy ________________ football.
2. The system has been designed to give the user quick and easy access ________________ the
required information.
3. The Great Barrier Reef is located ________________ the coast of Australia.
4. There were flags ________________ the tops of many of the buildings.
5. I can’t decide ________________ who to invite to the party.
6. In my opinion, he ranks ________________ the theatre’s greatest actors.
7. Her parents always regarded her ________________ the smartest of their children.
8. His dog was lying ________________ his feet.
9. ________________ the first months of life, an infant learns to lift its head, how to smile and how to
recognise its parents.
10. I am sure that Jack will do well ________________ the talent contest.

C. Grammar
• Reported speech (Yes / No questions)
I. Write reported questions.
1. “Have you cleaned your shoes?”
 She asked him
2. “Can you swim?”
 She asked me
3. “Are you listening to us?”
 We asked him
4. “Do you have a bicycle?”
 He asked me
5. “Have you played any sports in your free time?”
 The doctor asked him
6. “Are you in a hurry?”
 I asked my father
II. Put the words in the correct order to make reported questions.
1. “Were you on time?” she asked.
whether / had been /I / she / asked / on time
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. “Is your book on the table over there?” the teacher asked.
other there / the teacher / if / was / on the table / my book / asked
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. “Did you tell the truth?” she asked.
us / if / she / we / had told / the truth / asked
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. “Is it the time to start the concert?” he asked.
to start / asked / he / the time / if / was / it / the concert
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. “Have you seen my pen?” he asked.
whether / we / asked / had seen / he / his pen
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. “Will you invite all of your friends to the party?” Mai asked.
all of our friends / invite / we / would / to the party / asked / Mai / whether
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Complete the reported questions.
1. “Have you ever explored a grotto?” we asked Tom.
___________________________________________________________________________________

2. “Have you ever heard about the legends about Ha Long Bay?’ the teacher asked the students.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. “Did you go to Ha Long Bay last summer?” Jack asked Jane.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. “Is the gate of the national park near the bus stop?” the man asked us.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. “Is the teacher going to talk about the field trip to the countryside?” Jack asked Mai.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. “Did you see the thief?” the police officer asked me.
___________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Complete the direct questions.
1. I want to know if you are fifteen years old.
“Are ______________________________________________________________________________?
2. Can you tell me whether you made that cake easily or not?
“Did ______________________________________________________________________________?
3. I’d like to know if you are arriving tomorrow morning.
“Are ______________________________________________________________________________?
4. I’d like to know whether she is ready or not.
“Are ______________________________________________________________________________?
5. Can you tell me if you have finished your homework?
“Have _____________________________________________________________________________?
6. I was wondering if you’ve got a laptop.
“Have _____________________________________________________________________________?
V. Choose the correct answer to complete each of the following sentences.
1. I wondered ________________ the right thing.
A. whether I was doing B. if I am doing
C. was I doing D. am I doing
2. He ________________ that he was leaving for London that afternoon.
A. told me B. told to me C. said me D. says to me
3. Bill asked Tom ________________ in London.
A. does the train arrive B. did the train arrive
C. whether the train arrives D. if the train arrived
4. I asked them when ________________ changed.
A. was the timetable B. the timetable is
C. the timetable has been D. the timetable had been
5. She warned me ________________ late-night horror films.
A. don’t watch B. shouldn’t watch C. not to watch D. not watching
6. They asked me how many children ________________ in the school.
A. there are B. are there C. there were D. were there
7. The scientist said the Earth ________________ the Sun.
A. goes around B. is going around C. had gone around D. was going around
8. My parents reminded me ________________ the flowers.
A. remember to plant B. not to forget to plant
C. to plant D. to planting
9. They said they had come back ________________.
A. yesterday afternoon B. the day before
C. last week D. the day before yesterday
10. He asked me ________________ a seat.
A. have I reserved B. if I have reserved
C. whether had I reserved D. if I had reserved

D. Reading
• Reading about a travel destination
I. Read the text and the tasks that follow.
 At 5,895 metres, Kilimanjaro in Tanzania is the highest mountain in Africa. Most people believe
that its name comes from the Swahili word for “white mountain”. That’s because the top of
Kilimanjaro is covered in an ice cap. However, this is 80% smaller than in 1912 and experts believe
that the mountain could have no ice and snow in the next 20 years.
 Kilimanjaro lies 330 km south of the equator and it comprises three volcanoes. Two of them,
Mawenzi and Shira are extinct. The highest one, Kibo, is dormant, so it could erupt again. It last
erupted 360,000 years ago, but its most recent volcanic activity was only 200 years ago. The highest
point on Kilimanjaro is called Uhuru, on the edge of Kibo’s crater.
 Every year about 25,000 people try to go up Kilimanjaro. It isn’t something you can do on your
own. Local guides lead groups of people along one of the six routes to the summit and porters carry
your equipment. You need to be fit to take on the challenge, but you don’t need any special climbing
experience. However, about two-thirds of people don’t succeed, usually because of altitude sickness.
 The fastest time to climb Kilimanjaro was 5 hours, 38 minutes and 40 seconds by an Italian,
Bruno Brunod, in 2001. The oldest person to climb Kilimanjaro was a Frenchman named Valtee Daniel.
He was 87.
(Adapted from Achievers)
Task 1. Match headings A-D with paragraphs 1-4.
A. More than a mountain _______
B. Record breakers _______
C. The roof of Africa _______
D. Too much for some _______
Task 2. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), or F (false). Correct the false statements.
1. Kilimanjaro is the highest mountain in the world.
________________________________________________________________________________
2. There is less ice on top of the mountain than in the past.
________________________________________________________________________________
3. Mawenzi and Shira are dangerous volcanoes.
________________________________________________________________________________
4. Uhuru Peak is at the bottom of a volcano.
________________________________________________________________________________
5. There’s only one way to the top of the mountain.
________________________________________________________________________________
6. Some people often become ill because they are high up.
________________________________________________________________________________
7. It took Bruno Brunod just over five and a half hours to get to Uhuru Peak.
________________________________________________________________________________
8. You can’t go up Kilimanjaro when you are elderly.
________________________________________________________________________________
II. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false). Correct the false statements.
The Floating Islands of Lake Titicaca
What is it like having a different view from your window every day? It’s just like this for the Uros
people of Lake Titicaca in Peru. There are over forty “floating” islands here. Every day they are in a
different place on the lake which is 12,500 feet above the sea level.
These floating islands are home to about 300 people. There are small villages with three to ten
families on each island. Uros homes are small reed huts with one room. There is one bed for the
whole family. There isn’t any heating, and it is sometimes very cold on the lake.
Life on the islands is very simple. The men are fishermen on the lake. They have reed boats with
amazing animal faces to go fishing. The women are at home with the children. There’s one school for
the children but there isn’t a hospital or doctors nearby. These days, the islands are very popular with
tourists. It’s only a 30-minute motorboat ride from the city of Puno to be on the islands. Everyone is
welcome to experience this unique way of way.
(Adapted from Prepare)
1. Lake Titicaca is 12,500 feet above the ground.
________________________________________________________________________________
2. There are many families on each floating island.
________________________________________________________________________________
3. Uros homes are often big.
________________________________________________________________________________
4. Their homes and their fishing boat are made of the same material.
________________________________________________________________________________
5. Their homes are very comfortable.
________________________________________________________________________________
6. They live on fishing on the lake.
________________________________________________________________________________
7. The women take care of their children.
________________________________________________________________________________
8. All children go to the same school, but there is no hospital there.
________________________________________________________________________________
9. Tourism will develop on the floating islands in Lake Titicaca.
________________________________________________________________________________
10. Local people are not interested in tourism.
________________________________________________________________________________
III. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false). Correct the false statements.
Snowdonia
At 1,085 m, Snowdon is the highest mountain in England and Wales. It also gives its name to the
National Park around it, Snowdonia. Located in the north-west of Wales, Snowdonia is the largest of
Wales’s three National Parks. Its landscape is beautiful, including mountains, valleys, forests, rivers
and lakes. One of these lakes, Bala Lake, is the largest natural lake in Wales. It is home to a lot of fish.
Snowdonia has also got a long coastline with lots of fantastic beaches. Some are rocky, but most are
wide and sandy like Black Rock Sands or Barmouth. It is no surprise that about eight million people
visit Snowdonia every year.
Every year, lots of people climb up Snowdon. You do not need to be an experienced climber, but it is
important to wear walking shoes and to take things with you, such as warm clothes, a torch, and
some water.
An easier way to get to the top is by train. The Snowdon Mountain Railways operates every day from
March to October. It can get very busy at certain times, for example in school holidays, so you should
book your tickets early.
(Adapted from Studio)
1. No other mountains in England and Wales are higher than Snowdon.
________________________________________________________________________________
2. Snowdonia is the largest national park in England and Wales.
________________________________________________________________________________
3. No other natural lakes in Wales are bigger than Bala Lake.
________________________________________________________________________________
4. We can find several geographical features in Snowdonia.
________________________________________________________________________________
5. All beaches in Snowdonia are sandy.
________________________________________________________________________________
6. Eight million people live in Snowdonia.
________________________________________________________________________________
7. You should prepare things before climbing up Snowdon.
________________________________________________________________________________
8. The Snowdon Mountain Railways works all year round.
________________________________________________________________________________
9. The train can take you to the top of Snowdonia.
________________________________________________________________________________
10. It can get busy during school holidays.
________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Read the text, and do the tasks below.
The Lake District
A. The Lake District National Park is in the north of England. There are 15 national parks in Britain, but
the Lake District is bigger than the others. It is about 55 kilometres from east to west and 55
kilometres from north to south. There are mountains, lakes, woods, towns, villages and even some
beaches.
B. The Lake District is famous for its beautiful scenery. There are a lot of mountains and hundreds of
hills. There are 16 large lakes, and many smaller ones. This area has also got a lot of different animals:
for example, you can see rare animals like the red squirrel and the Golden Eagle.
C. Over 40,000 people live and work in the Lake District. There are also many visitors every year. You
can go walking and climbing in the hills, and go swimming and sailing on the lakes. You can also visit
many beautiful villages and towns, and the homes of two famous English writers: William
Wordsworth (1770-1850) and Beatrix Potter (1866-1943). It is a very popular place for visitors
because there is something for everyone!
(Source: Internet)
Task 1. Match the questions (1-3) with the paragraphs (A-C).
1. What can people do there? Paragraph ___________
2. Where is it, and how big is it? Paragraph ___________
3. What is the scenery like? Paragraph ___________
Task 2. Are the sentences T (true) or F (false)? Correct the false statements.
1. There are fifteen national parks in the north of England.
________________________________________________________________________________
2. The Lake District is forty-five kilometres wide.
________________________________________________________________________________
3. There aren’t any beaches in the Lake District.
________________________________________________________________________________
4. There are more than sixteen lakes.
________________________________________________________________________________
5. Forty thousand people visit the Lake District every year.
________________________________________________________________________________
6. You can visit the homes of two famous English writers.
________________________________________________________________________________
V. Read the text, and do the following tasks.
My Yellowstone Winter Experience
Yellowstone is the USA’s oldest national park. I spent the weekend there on a trip to Wyoming last
winter, and 1 stayed in a hotel in the park itself. On my first day, I travelled by bus across the snow.
Afterwards, my guide drove me to Old Faithful, a very famous geyser in the park. Every half an hour or
so, boiling water comes out of this enormous hole in the ground and reaches a height of between
27m and 56m.
Then I went back to my hotel until it was time for dinner at the restaurant. There were delicious fish
tacos and the best chocolate ice cream in the world! There were also some fantastic views outside.
On the second day, I visited Mammoth Hot Springs in the morning, but the highlight of my day was
swimming in Yellowstone. There are only two places to go swimming in the park. I sat in an enormous,
hot outdoor bath. 1 had one foot in the Gardiner River in freezing cold water and one foot in very hot
water from the hot springs. It was great fun and very relaxing. The geyser is an incredible sight. Then I
had time for a ride on a snowmobile. It was awesome, but it was also freezing.
Two days in Yellowstone National Park just wasn’t enough time to see it all.
Remember: You can’t drive a snowmobile without a driving licence.
(Adapted from Scope)
Task 1. What is the main idea of the text?
A. an information leaflet about hot springs
B. a travel review about a national park
C. a blog post about transport
D. a Geography textbook
Task 2. Read the meanings. Find the correct words in the text that match to them.
1. a person taking tourists to see places they don’t know _________________
2. natural warm water that comes out of the ground in a jet _________________
3. natural warm water that comes from underground _________________
4. a special vehicle for driving on snow _________________
5. a certificate you get when you can drive a car _________________
Task 3. Read the text again, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false). Correct the false
statements.
1. The writer’s hotel wasn’t in the national park.
________________________________________________________________________________
2. Old Faithful is the name of a famous jet of very famous hot water.
________________________________________________________________________________
3. The writer had dinner at the hotel restaurant.
________________________________________________________________________________
4. The hot springs weren’t very relaxing for the writer.
________________________________________________________________________________
5. The weather was warm when the writer was on the snowmobile.
________________________________________________________________________________
6. You need a driving licence to drive a snowmobile.
________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Iguazu, One of the Seven Natural Wonders of the World
Iguazu is a magnificent series of waterfalls located on the border of Argentina and Brazil. With more
than 275 individual waterfalls, Iguazu Falls is the most extensive waterfall system in the world.
As the water falls over the edge of the Iguazu River, it creates a mist that rises into the sky, creating a
rainbow-like effect. The Iguazu Falls is wider than the better-known Victoria Falls and taller than the
Niagara Falls in North America.
Volcanic eruptions which occurred many millions of years ago created the natural wonder. The Iguazu
National Park was founded in 1939, and covers an area of 1,700 square kilometers. The park is home
to 420 species of birds, around 70 different species of mammals, and some endangered reptiles and
amphibians. It is also home to over 2,000 species of plants. When visiting the Iguazu waterfalls, you
will experience a breathtaking landscape. The water mist forms a perfect habitat for numerous
insects, giant butterflies, and many different animal species.
With a bit of luck, you’ll see monkeys, frogs, snakes, and crocodiles in their natural environment. The
number of rare orchids and other plants that grow only in the Iguazu area is enormous. You can
discover many of the orchids on an exploration tour along the walkways.
An essential activity is to walk the Cataratas hiking trail, running along the Rio Iguazu River. It offers
fantastic panoramic photo opportunities of the waterfalls. At the end of the path, an elevator takes
you to the top, from which you can enjoy a spectacular view of the waterfalls.
(Source: Internet)
1. Iguazu Falls is the most extensive waterfall system in the world because _________________.
A. they are on the border of Argentina and Brazil
B. they wider than the better-known Victoria Falls
C. they are taller than the Niagara Falls in North America
D. they consist of hundreds of individual waterfalls
2. The mist forming from water falling down can make _________________.
A. you see the edge of the Iguazu River
B. you see a rainbow-like effect all the daytime
C. you experience a breathtaking landscape
D. water rise into the sky
3. The water mist supports _________________.
A. biodiversity in the surrounding area
B. over 2,000 species of plants
C. the foundation of the national park
D. life in an area of 1,700 square kilometers
4. You can see _________________ when you are lucky enough.
A. rare kinds of orchids around the waterfalls
B. a breathtaking landscape
C. some kinds of animals in their natural habitat
D. a small number of rare orchids and other plants
5. The Cataratas hiking trail can _________________.
A. help you walk around the waterfalls
B. help you go to the summit to enjoy a spectacular view of the waterfalls
C. help you do one of the leisure activities there
D. offer you opportunities to take nice photos of the waterfalls

E. Speaking
• Talking about a natural wonder
I. Complete the conversation between your father and Mr. Brown, a tour guide, with the clauses
given below. There are two extra clauses that you do not need.
A. Your children can spend time strolling around the nine different themed gardens, seeing
various types of plants, flowers and trees.
B. After a comfortable 20-minute climb, the magnificent views over the sea and island await.
C. I mean Jeju Island, and people from nearby Asian countries flock to its warm water and
sandy beaches.
D. But a day of sightseeing isn’t complete without enjoying some of the island’s delicious raw
seafood and barbecued black pork.
E. Golden beaches, winding coastal trails, and Jeju Waterworld.
F. Go to Hyeopjae, one of the most beautiful beaches on Jeju Island. Crystal clear water with
white sand beaches and not many tourists make this beach a sweet spot to escape the crowd.
Mr. Brown Good morning, sir. What can I do for you?
Dad Pleased to meet you. My family planned to go to Hawaii for this summer holiday, but
we don’t have enough time, so we have changed our plan.
Mr. Brown Why doesn’t your family choose South Korea’s Hawaii this summer?
Dad South Korea’s Hawaii? What do you mean?
1
Mr. Brown ______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Dad Can you tell me some tourist attractions on that island?
2
Mr. Brown ______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Dad I love hiking and trekking a lot. What could I do if 1 were there?
Mr. Brown You can trek to Seongsan Peak. 3 ____________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
If you don’t want to reach the peak, wandering around the hill is a lovely experience.
Dad Can you recommend any beaches?
Mr. Brown Looking for a beach destination? 4 ___________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Dad Our children love visiting gardens or zoos? Can they do that on Jeju Island?
5
Mr. Brown They can. Your family can go to Hallim Park.
___________________________________
 _______________________________________________________________________
There’s also a small zoo with turtles, snakes, peacocks and other birds.
Dad Anything else we can do during the tour?
Mr. Brown So many. 6 ______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
• Everyday English: Asking for permission and responding
II. Put the following expressions into the correct groups.
Can I ask you a question? Go ahead.
Please take your freedom. May I have a piece of cake?
Could I get you to turn off the lights? Sorry, you are not allowed to.
Very sorry. That’s not possible. Do you mind if I turn on the DVD player?
Is it OK if I sit here? Sure.
I can’t allow you to do that. Please, don’t do that.
No problem. It’s fine.
Would it be all right if 1 borrowed your pen?
Asking for permission:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Giving permission:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Refusing to give permission:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Read the following situations. Then make the conversations to ask for permission and
responding to each.
1. You want to sit in a different place in the classroom, and the teacher agrees.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
2. You would like to turn down the TV set. You ask fop permission and your father agrees.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
3. You want to use the dictionary during the test, but the teacher says “no”
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
4. You want to watch a DVD after you have finished your homework. You ask your mother for
permission, and she agrees.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
5. You want to go to the cinema with your group after school. You ask your mother for permission.
She agrees but she asks you not to come back home too late.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________

F. Writing
• Writing a paragraph about a natural wonder / landscape in an area
Write a paragraph about Ba Vi National Park, using the cues given below.
- Ba Vi National Park: a mountainous area, located on the outskirts of Ha Noi
- Ba Vi: one of the famous tourist attractions - its natural beauty and special geographic features
- Ba Vi National Park: called “Capital Ha Noi’s Lung” - covers an area of more than 12,000 hectares of
forests, with a biodiversity of fauna and flora
- the park: the home / more than 800 rare and exotic plants, 44 species of mammals, 15 species of
reptiles and more than 100 bird species
- also contains a fascinating complex of numerous lakes, offers various famous relaxing tourism spots
Ba Vi National Park is a mountainous area, located
__________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 1 (UNIT 7)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. paradise B. annual C. majestic D. landscape
2. A. locate B. ecosystem C. snow D. rocky
3. A. heritage B. urgent C. hesitate D. access
4. A. occasion B. accommodation C. access D. occur
5. A. preserve B. access C. destination D. sustainable
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. He is not just interested, he is _______________ about it.
A. angry B. crazy C. hasty D. lazy
7. Marketing plays a key role in a company’s plan for _______________ development.
A. supportive B. comfortable C. favourable D. sustainable
8. They live in a(n) _______________ country cottage - it is really nice.
A. sweet B. elegant C. charming D. pleasant
9. The flowers at the _______________ flower show were a beautiful sight.
A. annual B. occurring C. lasting D. continual
10. This is a problem that requires _______________ attention.
A. important B. urgent C. required D. impressive
11. Tourism _______________ substantially to the local economy.
A. shares B. offers C. affords D. contributes
12. They went on an expedition to _______________ the flora and fauna of the region.
A. explore B. hunt C. consider D. realise
13. The island in the Caribbean Sea is really a tropical _______________.
A. universe B. kingdom C. paradise D. heaven
14. Ha Long Bay is a popular holiday _______________.
A. decision B. arrival C. purpose D. destination
15. The garden has been designed to harmonise with the natural _______________.
A. landscape B. view C. scene D. sight
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
 landscape destination tour location
wonders diverse located travel
16
Grand Canyon National Park is one of the most well-known natural _______________ of the world.
17
Carved over millions of years by the Colorado River, the Grand Canyon, _______________ in
Arizona, is a breathtaking sight. At more than a mile deep and 277 miles long, the Grand Canyon is
neither the steepest nor the longest canyon in the world. But the Grand Canyon in America was
chosen as a natural wonder for its overall size and beautifully coloured landscape.
18
Visitors can hike, or take a helicopter _______________ to explore the park’s landscape, which
includes red rock formations, towering cliffs, and winding canyons. The Grand Canyon is also home to
a 19 _______________ range of plant and animal life, with over 70 species of mammals, 250 species of
20
birds, and numerous reptiles and amphibians. The park is a must- visit _______________ for any
nature lover. It is visited by nearly 6 million people every year.
IV. Read the questions. Choose the correct reported questions.
21. “Do you know about the Snowman?”
a. He asked me if I knew about the Snowman.
b. He asked me if 1 know about the Snowman.
22. “Will you set off early?”
a. She asked me would I set off early.
b. She asked me if I would set off early.
23. “Do you want a new laptop?”
a. My dad asked me did I want a new laptop.
b. My dad asked me if I wanted a new laptop.
24. “Can 1 borrow your calculator?”
a. Mai asked if she can borrow my calculator.
b. Mai asked if she could borrow my calculator.
25. “Is there a public library near here?”
a. They asked whether there was a public library near there.
b. They asked if there is a public library near here.
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Great Barrier Reef
 26
The world’s largest coral reefs and the Earth’s biggest single structure made by living ,
27
_______________ Australia’s Great Barrier Reef is known _______________ one of the richest and
28
most complex natural systems in the world, and it _______________ a multitude of life, including
29
630 species of starfish, 600 types of hard and soft corals, 215 species of birds, over 100
___________ of sharks, 30 species of dolphins and whales and so on.
In reality, the Great Barrier Reef is not just one big, long, connected reef. It consists of more
than 3,000 30 _______________ reefs - ranging from two acres to more than 25,000 acres. Nearly 10
percent of the world's fish species 31 _______________ the reefs. Sadly, however, many of the species
32
that live on and near the reefs are endangered. Other environmental _______________ include
water quality from runoff and climate change accompanied by mass coral bleaching.
The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park was established in 1975, and the Australian government
33 34
imposed _____________ on environmental and recreational procedures aimed at
35
_____________. The authority has preserved the _______________ of aboriginal populations,
allowing them to continue traditional use of the reef and its biodiversity. The Great Barrier Reef was
declared a World Heritage site in 1981.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. bodies B. structures C. persons D. organisms
27. A. as B. for C. with D. 0
28. A. holds B. supports C. promotes D. takes care of
29. A. varieties B. mixtures C. changes D. ranks
30. A. specific B. personal C. definite D. individual
31. A. occupy B. live on C. inhabit D. accommodate
32. A. pressures B. forces C. burdens D. strengths
33. A. directions B. arrangements C. regulations D. commands
34. A. maintenance B. sustainability C. continuation D. flexibility
35. A. priorities B. conditions C. preservation D. rights
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Ha Long Bay - One of the Greatest Natural Wonders of the World
As a UNESCO World Heritage Site (recognised twice in 1994 and 2000) and a natural wonder of the
world, Ha Long Bay features thousands of limestone islands and cliffs, emerging from the sea. If you
have not visited Ha Long Bay, you have not yet seen the most beautiful place in the world. Located
180 kilometres northeast of Ha Noi, it takes around 4 hours to get there by coach. There are 1969
limestone islands of various shapes, sizes in different green and amazing colours rising above the sea
level in an area of more than 1,500 square kilometres. Ha Long Bay still keeps its historical and
cultural value.
Ha Long Bay is attractive and beautiful throughout the four seasons. Travelling on small boats among
hundreds of small islands, one may visit the amazing Surprise Cave, the floating fishing village, and see
how the locals live. On Titov Island, one may swim and relax on the beach or enjoy a kayak cruise to
the nearby Luon Cave. One can take a cruise from the harbour and cross Ha Long Bay in luxury cabins
with ocean views and private balconies. You will have fresh air all day and night, especially when you
wake up early in the morning and watch the sunrise on the deck. You can continue your trip to
explore the caves and grottoes, heading over to Bai Tu Long Bay and Lan Ha Bay, trekking in Cat Ba
National Park, rock climbing, kayaking, and watching some of the most amazing sunsets that you’ll
ever set eyes on.
(Source: Internet)
36. Ha Long Bay _______________.
A. first became a UNESCO World Heritage Site in 2000
B. is a UNESCO World Heritage Site and a natural wonder of the world
C. has hundreds of limestone islands and cliffs
D. has hundreds of island with an area of more than 1,500 square kilometres
37. Tourists can do all of the following activities in Ha Long Bay EXCEPT _______________.
A. fishing B. kayaking C. swimming D. sunbathing
38. We can infer from the passage that in Ha Long Bay _______________.
A. tourists can see sunsets twice in a day
B. tourists cannot touch the rock there
C. tourists can explore caves and grottoes on Titov Island
D. tourists can spend the nights on luxury boats
39. From Ha Long Bay tourists can _______________.
A. climb up high mountains
B. take part in kayaking competitions
C. travel to other tourist attractions
D. travel to Ha Noi by boat
40. All of the following are true about Ha Long Bay EXCEPT that.
A. there are various activities for tourists to take part in
B. tourists should go there in the right season
C. the tour is for anyone who loves the nature
D. the tour is also left for people who loves water sports
VII. Complete the conversation with the phrases given below. There are two extra phrases that you
do not need.
A. travel to the spot by bus after you arrive at the airport
B. wear the provided life vest and hard hats for their safety
C. board a small boat that will bring you inside the Underground River
D. light and comfortable clothes, trekking sandals or rubber slippers
E. located 80 kilometres north of the city of Puerto Princesa on Palawan Island
F. discovered the second floor inside, and there are small waterfalls inside the cave
G. to show you the cave's stalagmites and stalactites, rock formations, and its inhabitants -
bats, birds and reptiles
Ann Hi, Mai. Our group is going to give a presentation about a natural wonder. Have you decided
yet?
Mai We should choose one of the New Seven Wonders of Nature.
Ann You mean Ha Long Bay?
Mai But all our classmates know about it. We should choose something new. Why don’t we talk
about the underground river in the Philippines? I mean the Puerto Princesa Underground
River. I’ve searched for its information.
Ann Where is it in the Philippines?
41
Mai That underground river is also a national park,
______________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Ann Can tourists get into the national park freely?
Mai Of course not. You need to get your permit and pay the environmental and boat fees. Then
you’ll 42 ______________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Ann What can tourists do during the tour inside the Underground River?
Mai The tour guide will use a torchlight 43 ______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Ann What should tourists prepare for the trip?
44
Mai They should wear
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Ann Are there any tips for security?
Mai They should always 45 ___________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Ann I think that’s nearly enough information about the presentation.
Mai Not at all. Besides that, there are a lot of nearby attractions and activities around that wonder.
Is it OK if it is your part to contribute to the presentation.
VIII. Write sentences about Nha Trang Beach, using the cues given below. The introduction has
been done for you.
Nha Trang Beach is on South-Central Coast of Viet Nam. It is well known for its fantastic beaches. It is
located on the beautiful Nha Trang Bay, surrounded on three sides by mountains.
46. thanks / its beautiful beaches / white sand and the clear ocean water with mild temperatures all
year round / Nha Trang: a popular destination / both international and domestic tourists
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. Nha Trang Beach: a wide range of activities / water sports
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. you / surf / tropical beaches at a cheap cost / go scuba-diving / see the colourful coral reefs /
snorkeling / feel the underwater world
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. having a party or camping on the beach at night / one of the most exciting activities / not miss /
if / travelling / your family or friends
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. tourists / join local groups / clear litter / the sand and sea every Sunday morning // volunteers /
also wear / goggles and snorkels / clear the underwater sea for debris
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 2 (UNIT 7)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. diversity B. admire C. climbing D. cliff
2. A. peak B. seafood C. fear D. leader
3. A. crazy B. coral C. destination D. locate
4. A. else B. realise C. paradise D. rehearse
5. A. natural B. destination C. permit D. majestic
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. That collective farm is 50 square kilometres in _______________.
A. length B. width C. area D. land
7. A volcanic _______________ is when gas and lava are released from a volcano.
A. flow B. explosion C. burst D. eruption
8. In fact, the majority of the Sahara is made up of barren, rocky plateaus, as well as sand
____________, mountains and dry valleys.
A. dunes B. cliffs C. ranges D. ridges
9. Teheran, the capital of Iran, is surrounded by mountain _______________.
A. valleys B. walls C. ranges D. routes
10. Southeast Utah in the USA is a great place to go _______________ and mountain biking.
A. marching B. wandering C. hiking D. walking
11. The land loses its protective cover of vegetation and soon turns into _______________.
A. wasteland B. wilderness C. waste D. desert
12. Since the _______________ last erupted, many houses have been built in a dangerous position on
its slopes.
A. cliff B. volcano C. peak D. range
13. The castle is located on a hill overlooking a deep _______________.
A. valley B. hill C. stream D. gap
14. If you stand on the edge of a _______________, you’ll be able to see the waves crashing on the
rocks below.
A. range B. valley C. cliff D. rock
15. Mount Kilimanjaro is famous for being the home of Africa’s highest _______________.
A. quantity B. peak C. level D. rank
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
sites variety height rainfall
rainforest biodiversity scenes parks
16
Victoria Falls is about three times the _______________ of Niagara Falls in America. Victoria Falls,
located on the Zambezi River, is the grandest waterfall in the world. It runs 5,500 feet at its widest
point and its flow is 33,000 cubic feet per second, spilling 625 million litres of water every minute. This
17
natural wonder was named a World Heritage Site in 1989. The waterfall and its surrounding
18
______________ are protected by two national _______________. The nearby forests and
grasslands are home to elephants, giraffes, lions, leopards, and zebras. The region is also home to the
19 20
only _______________ in the world where rain falls every day. Victoria Falls is one of the best
_______________ to watch a rainbow. The rainbow can be seen at any time of day, but it is brightest
during the early daylight hours.
IV. Complete the reported questions.
21. “Did you finish your homework?”
 The teacher asked me
22. “Are you watching the news?”
 Dad asked me
23. “Have you seen the newspapers?”
 Mum asked us
24. “Can we start playing?”
 They asked
25. “Has anyone finished?”
 Jane asked
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Aurora Borealis
26
Also known as the Northern Lights, the aurora borealis _____________ everyone who is lucky
enough to see these blue, green, pink, red, violet and yellow patches or shooting rays along the
horizon or across the night sky. Humans have 27 _____________ legends around the 28 _____________
of these lights. In medieval times, these lights signaled famine or war, while the Inuit believed them to
be the spirits of whales, deer, salmon and seals that they hunted for 29 _____________.
Scientists have said that this effect is caused by electrically charged particles from the Sun’s magnetic
30
field _____________ the Earth’s atmosphere. These particles collided with gaseous particles, and
the result is seen by us as dancing lights in an irregularly shaped oval over each of our planet’s
magnetic 31 _____________.
Scientists say that northern and southern auroras most often 32 _____________ at the same time. The
33
variations in colour are determined by the type of particles most _____________ in the collisions.
34
Unfortunately, we cannot _____________ when the Northern Lights will appear, but the best
chances for witnessing them are between the months of March to April and September to October.
The 35 _____________ conditions are usually found on a cold, dark night with clear skies.
(Adapted from New Frontiers)
26. A. amuses B. entertains C. interests D. comforts
27. A. created B. produced C. built D. performed
28. A. purpose B. foundation C. reason D. cause
29. A. survival B. endurance C. continuation D. durability
30. A. breaking B. falling C. entering D. inserting
31. A. posts B. poles C. sticks D. places
32. A. pass B. repeat C. occur D. follow
33. A. instant B. immediate C. current D. present
34. A. declare B. predict C. prepare D. expect
35. A. imaginary B. ideal C. abstract D. theoretical
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Mount Everest
Mount Everest, the highest mountain on the Earth with 8,848 metres above the sea level, is part of
the Himalaya range, and is located on the border between Nepal, and Tibet, China. It is called
“Sagarmatha” in Nepal which means “goddess of the sky”, and the name in Tibet is “Chomolungma”
which means “mother goddess of the universe”. In 1865 upon the recommendation of an English
adventurer, the English name “Everest” became official.
Mount Everest attracts climbers of all levels, from experienced to new climbers which are willing to
pay substantial sums to professional mountain guides to complete a successful climb. The mountain
still has many inherent dangers, such as altitude sickness, weather and wind. In spite of that
information, by the end of the 2007 climbing season, there had been 3,679 ascents to the summit by
2,436 individuals, which means climbers are a significant source of the Nepal tourism.
The government requires climbers to obtain an expensive permit, costing up to $25,000 per person.
Mount Everest has claimed 210 lives, including eight who perished during a 1996 storm high on the
mountain.
(Source: Internet)
36. Mount Everest is located _____________.
A. next to the Himalaya range
B. between Nepal and China
C. on the border between several countries
D. between Sagarmatha and Chomolungma
37. The name “Everest” is _____________.
A. the name in Tibet which means “mother goddess of the universe
B. the name in Nepal which means “goddess of the sky”
C. the name used before 1865
D. the English official name
38. Climbers who have climbed up Mount Everest are _____________.
A. only experienced climbers
B. only professional climbers
C. both experienced and amateur climbers
D. professional, native mountain guides
39. All of the following are true about Mount Everest EXCEPT that _____________.
A. there are several dangers that climbers face
B. the government introduces the expensive permit for the security of climbers
C. there have been people who have climbed Mount Everest more than once
D. unexperienced climbers could climb up to the summit with the help of someone very experienced
40. The word “perished” in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to _____________.
A. killed B. survived C. died D. disappeared
VII. Complete the conversation with the phrases given below. There are two extra phrases that you
do not need.
A. a fantastic destination for scuba diving
B. up to 3 metres in length and over 70 kilograms in weight
C. established in 1980 with the aim of preserving the habitat of the Komodo dragon
D. rich in flora and fauna and is still relatively little known
E. for a toral area of 2,000 square kilometers
F. well-known as the natural habitat of the Komodo dragon, the largest lizard on the Earth
G. natural attractions: steep hills, jungles, grasslands, beaches, coral reefs, and of course
Komodo dragons
Jack What are you reading about?
Nam It’s a UNESCO Heritage Site in Southeast Asia. But it’s not Ha Long Bay in Viet Nam or the
Underground River in the Philippines.
Jack Can you give me any cues about it?
Nam It’s an island, but not Jeju Island because that island is in Korea.
Jack I guess you mean Komodo Island in Indonesia.
41
Nam You’re right. The island of Komodo is
______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Jack Has the government set up a national park on the island?
Nam Not exactly. The entire island is part of the Komodo National Park. Today, the Komodo
National Park includes 29 volcanic islands, the largest of which are Rinca, Padar and Komodo.
Jack How large is the national park?
42
Nam It stretches across land and water
________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Jack What can we find on the island of Komodo?
Nam The area includes different types of 43 ______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Jack How big is the Komodo dragon?
44
Nam It can reach
__________________________________________________________________
 _____________________________________________________________________________
Jack Can tourists get close to them?
Nam Don’t get close to them because they can attack humans. Visitors should always be
accompanied by a ranger.
Jack Can tourists explore anything about marine life around the island?
45
Nam Its underwater environment is particularly
_________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Write sentences about Phu Quoc, using the cues given below. The introduction has been done
for you.
Phu Quoc is the largest island of Viet Nam, located in the Gulf of Thailand. The best time to visit Phu
Quoc is in the dry season from November to May.
46. beaches of Phu Quoc: make a strong impression / tourists / the magnificent natural landscape
with blue sea, white sand and golden sunshine// beaches along the north of the island / most
beautiful ones
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. Phu Ọuoc / have / a perfect combination / natural landscapes, cultural sites and adventure
activities
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. nightlife in Phu Quoc: peaceful and comfortable / many fascinating experiences / going night
squid fishing, visiting the night market, and so on
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. tourists: join “Green Sunday” campaign / Phu Quoc greener, cleaner and more beautiful
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. gather garbage / collect plastic waste along beaches, residential areas and small islands
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 8. TOURISM
A. Pronunciation
● Stress in words ending in -ic and -ious
I. Write the words below in the correct row, according to the stress pattern.
energetic ambitious scenic fantastic magic
automatic economic cautious romantic sympathetic
electronic nutritious artistic scientific anxious
enthusiastic democratic notorious religious mountainous
Oo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
oOo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
oOoo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
ooOo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
oooOo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
II. Mark the primary stress (’) in the underlined words, then read the sentences aloud.
1. He is an energetic young man and have ambitious goals in life.
2. Ms. White is good at cooking nutritious dishes in artistic designs.
3. They are anxious about the economic problems, and seem very sympathetic.
4. Thanks to scientific advance, many automatic machines have been invented.
5. We admire the magic, romantic landscape of the mountainous region.
6. The buildings were in ruinous state, and the government took cautious measures to preserve them.

B. Vocabulary
• Tourism
I. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
tourism accommodation tan delicious natural beauty
agencies destinations safari terraced holidaymakers
1. The history of _________________ fields is associated with the history of residence of ethnic
groups in Viet Nam’s northern mountains.
2. At the largest _________________ park in Viet Nam, you will enjoy the splendor of mountain
ranges, the mystery of dense forests and the wilderness of nature.
3. The country depends on _________________ for much of its income.
4. I called several travel _________________ to compare prices before I booked a package holiday.
5. The price includes travel and _________________ but meals are extra.
6. She came back from a seashore holiday with a deep _________________.
7. The _________________ smell of freshly made coffee came from the kitchen.
8. California, along with Florida and Hawaii, is among the most popular US tourist
_________________.
9. Beaches in Central Viet Nam continues to attract more _________________.
10. Viet Nam is renowned for its abundant biodiversity and _________________.
II. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
waves locations lovers nightlife
visitors home residents lifestyle
Welcome To Hawaii
Hawaii is a popular holiday destination. But which island should you choose for your holiday in
paradise?
OAHU
All the international flights go from the capital, Honolulu, on Oahu Island. Oahu is the most populated
island and 1 _________________ of the famous Waikiki beach. International surfing competitions take
place here. Oahu is also the place for shops, restaurants and the best 2 _________________.
MAUI
Maui is the most romantic island and ideal for relaxing. There are white sandy beaches with turquoise
water, and in summer the 3 _________________ are small and perfect for inexperienced surfers. In
4
winter, you can see whales in the warm water. Maui is ideal for nature _________________ and
visitors fall in love with the island’s natural beauty.
BIG ISLAND
Big Island is cheaper and for the more adventurous 5 _________________. You can go to the top of
the highest mountain 4,000 metres above sea level and enjoy an amazing view.
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word or phrase given below.
leisure off the beaten track package holiday off peak resort
peak cut-price tickets travel agents youth hostels hitchhiking
1
People have more money and more _________________ nowadays and even young people can
afford to go abroad. Many 2 _________________ offer cheap 3 _________________ for flights to all
parts of the world, so youngsters can avoid the crowded, well-known places and get to less famous
areas which are 4 ______________. Instead of using public transport and hotels, they can travel by 5

6 7
_____________ and stay at _________________. But most people prefer some kind of
8
_________________ at a popular holiday _________________, which means that everything is
arranged for you and the price you pay includes transport, food and accommodation. Try to avoid
9
taking your holiday during the busy _________________ tourist season. It is more crowded and
expensive. If possible, go in the quieter 10 _________________ period.
Note: - hitchhike (v) = to travel by getting free rides in other people’s cars
● Vocabulary for Reading
IV. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
ruinous site fixed hunting budget search
entrance ticket smooth estimate cost itinerary
1. With the arrival of a number of ________________ airlines, domestic air travel became an
affordable option.
2. _______________ to Aquatopia Water Park is the key to opening a unique, mysterious and
attractive playing space in the paradise of southern Phu Quoc.
3. If you are a first-time visitor to Ha Noi, our three-day _________________ should give you a good
idea of what to see and do.
4. The _________________ does not include souvenirs and snacks during the trip.
5. My Son Sanctuary, situated in a peaceful valley surrounded by mountains, is a famous
____________.
6. They _________________ that the journey will take at least two weeks.
7. You should _________________ the Internet for cheap flights.
8. She is still _________________ for a new job.
9. The classes begin and end at _________________ times.
10. We had a very _________________ flight with no turbulence at all.
● Prepositions
V. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. We have selected the best destinations _______ a city break in the countryside with friends, and
family.
2. The restaurant is well known _______ its friendly atmosphere and excellent service.
3. We only got back _______ our trip yesterday.
4. Can you do it all _______ your own? I’m happy to help.
5. You tell us where and when you want to travel and we will take care _______ the rest.
6. Have you decided where you are going _______ your holiday this year?
7. The best time to take a cruise _______ the Mekong River is during the dry season, between
November and April.
8. I didn’t go abroad _______ a holiday because I couldn't afford it.
9. The teacher wants the children to feel confident _____ asking questions when they don’t
understand.
10. I have worked _______ a new way of doing it.

C. Grammar
• Relative pronouns & relative adverbs
I. Choose the correct pronouns in the following sentences.
1. This is the restaurant who / whose owner is a famous actor.
2. Is there a shop near here who / that sells laptops?
3. That’s the artist which / whose paintings are in the National Gallery.
4. I don’t like people that / which smoke in the street.
5. Students who / whose are late for school usually get extra homework.
6. I live in a town which / whose landscape is very beautiful.
7. I saw a boy who / whose looked like Harry Potter!
8. I don’t like films who / which have talking animals.
9. Do you know the shop which / where sells DVDs?
10. Is that the actor w ho / whose was in Star Wars?
II. Choose the correct answer to complete the sentences.
1. Have you visited the museum __________ is in Tran Hung Dao Street?
a. where b. whose c. that
2. Yesterday I saw a man __________works at the library.
a. who b. which c. whose
3. Tonight, we can watch the film __________stars your favourite actor.
a. who b. where c. which
4. The person __________wrote this story has an amazing imagination.
a. where b. whose c. that
5. I find it difficult to read books __________include long descriptions of places.
a. where b. which c. who
6. My mobile phone is the object __________I love most.
a. who b. whose c. which
III. Choose the correct options to complete the sentences.
1. That’s the woman who / where works in the supermarket.
2. Hamburg is the city who / where Lidia went to university.
3. Is that the cake that / who you made for Mai’s birthday?
4. Did you take the money where / that was on the table?
5. The hotel where / which we stayed on holiday was terrible.
6. Have you seen that video of the man which / who can eat metal?
7. Did you get the message who / which I sent you last night?
8. Helen is the only person I know where / that hates pizza.
9. That’s the library which / where I met her.
10. I don’t like films which / who make me cry.
IV. Complete the sentences with who, which) whose or where,
1. The girl __________ won the competition was only 13 years old.
2. Minecraft is a game __________ is really good fun to play.
3. I prefer to play games in my room, __________ I’m not likely to be disturbed.
4. This is the computer game __________ my parents gave me for my birthday.
5. Is this the shop __________ you usually buy your lunch?
6. My uncle, __________ company designs graphics, is a very rich man.
7. Sandra is the girl __________ invited me to your party.
8. I don’t understand people __________ don’t enjoy sports.
9. Last year we went to Hoi An, __________ there are a lot of tourist attractions.
10. Do you know any courses __________ can help us develop skills like teamwork, confidence, and
independence?
V. Match sentence halves 1-8 with a-h. Write the answers in each blank.
1. These are the flowers ______ a. whose guitar was stolen?
2. Here’s the dog ______ b. who is afraid of spiders.
3. Shall we watch the film ______ c. where we played football.
4. Are we near the shop ______ d. which you read earlier?
5. We know a girl ______ e. which I took for a walk.
6. Is that the musician ______ f. which I bought for you.
7. Can I see the article about arts ______ g. where I saw that nice watch?
8. This is the park ______ h. that’s on the other TV channel?
VI. Complete the sentences with an ending below and the correct relative pronoun.
a. ... my mum and dad first met.
b. ... takes place on a beach.
c. ... was in a film about dancing.
d. ... have Brad Pitt in them.
e. ... Mai is reading.
f. ... is showing at the City Theatre.
1. This is the book ____________________________________________________.
2. I enjoy all films ____________________________________________________.
3. That is the cinema __________________________________________________.
4. This is a great film __________________________________________________.
5. I love that actress __________________________________________________.
6. Susan wants to see the play __________________________________________.
VII. Complete the sentences with the phrases below. Use relative clauses.
we drove to Nha Trang
 their son was born
you work quietly or borrow books
builds his own hospital in India
designs computer systems for businesses
1. The programme is about a Swiss doctor ________________________________________________
2. That’s the car _____________________________________________________________________
3. Cambodia is the country ____________________________________________________________
4. He works for an IT company _________________________________________________________
5. A library is a place _________________________________________________________________
VIII. Complete the sentences with that, which, who, where or whose. Sometimes more than one
answer is possible.
1. My new teacher ________ lives near the school is very nice.
2. I know a cheap café ________ we can go to.
3. My friend ________ unfriendly neighbours made a lot of noise has just sold his apartment.
4. He told me about his new bike ________ he bought last week.
5. There's a boy in my class ________ parents are both university professors.
6. Do you like the electronic watch ________ my parents bought for me yesterday?
7. A zoo is a place ________ you can see wild animals.
8. Cristiano Ronaldo is a famous footballer ________ plays for Portugal.
9. The Siberian tiger is an animal ________ can run very fast.
10. Cappuccino is a drink ________ you make with coffee and milk.
11. Miley Cyrus is an actress and singer ________ comes from the USA.
12. A supermarket is a shop ________ people can buy different types of goods.
IX. Connect the sentences with suitable relative pronouns. Sometimes more than one answer is
possible.
1. Mike has a collection. It has more than 5,000 old coins.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. That’s my cousin. I told you about him yesterday.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Where’s the man? You found his wallet.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. That’s the girl. She often helps me with my homework.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Is there anyone at school? That person has got a stamp collection.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Look at the boy. He goes cycling at 5.30 every morning.
___________________________________________________________________________________

D. Reading
● Reading about different types of tours
I. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false). Correct the false statements.
Vacations for less!
Couchsurfing helps you stay free of charge in about 250 countries around the world. Couchsurfing.org
is an international network with more than 3 million members. Members offer people a place to stay
in their homes. In return, they can stay free at another member’s home. Members are students and
professionals. You can be a surfer or a host or both.
If you want to couchsurf, here’s what to do:
- Find a host who has positive references and a complete profile.
- Look for a host who has similar interests.
- Write a request to your host.
- Bea good guest.
- Don’t be rude or messy! Help with the household chores.
- Write a reference as soon as possible to help other couchsurfers.
A staycation is a vacation that you spend at home. It’s a way to have a rest from work and your
routine without spending much money. Maybe it sounds boring, but it doesn’t have to be. Here are
some tips to make your staycation fun.
- Spend time at home. Invite friends to use your pool or sunbathe in your backyard.
- Visit your local parks and museums. Sometimes there are really cool things in your
hometown.
- Find out about local festivals in your neighbourhood.
- Change your routine - don’t do what you usually do every day. Do something different. Get
up late. Change shops. Eat different foods. Take a bus, cycle or walk for a change.
- Relax and don’t think about work until your staycation is over.
 (Source: Internet)
1. Couchsurfing only happens in one country.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. You don’t pay for couchsurfing.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Couchsurfers write references.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Staycations are always boring.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. People on staycation don’t go out.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. On a staycation the idea is to do different things.
___________________________________________________________________________________
II. Read the text, and write NY for Times Square, New York City, LV for the Las Vegas Strip, DC for
Washington DC to answer the questions.
Top Three Tourist Destinations in the USA
Time Square, New York City
People know it for its many Broadway theatres, movie theatres and bright signs and they call it the
“crossroads of the world”. It is the most bustling and busy square in North America with an average of
over 2,000 people walking across it every 15 minutes on a weekday. It got its name in 1904 from The
New York Times newspaper because their headquarters were there.
The Las Vegas Strip
This 4.2 mile stretch of boulevard in Clark County attracts over 36 million visitors a year. Its lights
come from luxurious hotels, resorts, and shopping malls that attract people from all over the world.
Nineteen of the world’s 25 largest hotels are here and many of them offer top-class entertainment in
the form of concerts, musicals, magic shows, comedies, and conventions.
Washington, DC
There is a huge national park filled with famous monuments, museums, and landmarks. Here you can
see the Washington Memorial, the Lincoln Memorial, the National Air and Space Museum, the
Smithsonian Castle and much more. It gets around 24 million visitors every year, but local people also
use it for leisure activities, concerts, festivals, and other annual events.
1. You can find theatres there. ____________
2. You can visit lots of historic sites there. ____________
3. It got its name from a newspaper. ____________
4. About 8,000 people walk across it every hour on a weekday. ____________
5. There are 24 million visitors to come there every year. ____________
6. There are a lot of luxurious hotels there. ____________
7. It is the busiest square in the USA. ____________
8. It attracts 36 million visitors a year. ____________
9. We can hold meetings or events there. ____________
10. You can enjoy entertainment there. ____________
III. Read the text, and do the tasks below.
Out and about in London
1. Museums and Galleries
Visit Madame Tussauds and see models of the world’s most famous people, including your favourite
actors and singers. There are some great museums. Don’t forget Egyptian mummies at the British
Museum or the dinosaurs at the Natural History Museum. Do you like modern art? Then visit the Tate
Modern.
2. Interesting buildings
The Tower of London is over 900 years old and for a long time it was a prison. After the Tower, take a
boat trip down the river to St Paul’s Cathedral, and then take a ride on the London Eye. There are
fantastic views from the top.
3. Shopping
There are lots of fantastic shops in London. Walk down Oxford Street, or visit one of the lively street
markets, where everything is cheap!
4. Night life
There are lots of exciting things to do in the evening. The West End is full of theaters, cinemas and
great restaurants. There are all kinds of concerts every night - rock, classical, pop, jazz...
5. Sport and leisure
Relax or walk in Hyde Park - it’s clean and safe. Do you like football? Then go and see Chelsea play at
Stamford Bridge. If you prefer tennis, there’s Wimbledon in June.
(Adapted from Scope)
Task 1. Match the photos (A-E) with the paragraphs (1-5).
Photo A: paragraph ____________________
Photo B: paragraph ____________________
Photo C: paragraph ____________________
Photo D: paragraph ____________________
Photo E: paragraph ____________________
Task 2. Where can you....
1. relax and walk? ______________________________________
2. watch Chelsea play? ______________________________________
3. see models of famous people? ______________________________________
4. look at modern art? ______________________________________
5. watch tennis? ______________________________________
6. find lots of theaters? ______________________________________
7. find cheap things to buy? ______________________________________
8. enjoy wonderful views of the city? ______________________________________
Task 3. Match the underlined adjectives in the text with their opposite given below.
1. boring # ___________________
2. dangerous # ___________________
3. dirty # ___________________
4. expensive # ___________________
5. old # ___________________
6. terrible # ___________________
IV. Read Mai’s travel blog, and do the tasks that follow.
My Travel Blog
Posted Monday 21st, from Istanbul
Last month I went with my family to Turkey. We flew by plane from Ha Noi to Istanbul. The flight took
7 hours. It was very boring, and 1 couldn’t sleep. At the airport we got into a taxi and drove very fast
to the hotel. The hotel was OK, but it wasn’t fantastic. The next day I woke up very early and we had
breakfast. There were eggs, some bread, yoghurt, tomatoes and cheese. It was different but 1 liked it.
After breakfast, we walked into the centre and looked around the city. The weather was terrible. It
was cold and windy. We did some sightseeing, and I had a great time. We visited the Sultan Ahmed
Mosque (the Blue Mosque), which was big. I took a lot of photos outside.
In the afternoon, we walked through the Grand Bazaar (it’s got 3,000 shops). It was an amazing place,
but I didn’t buy anything. I don’t speak Turkish, but a lot of people could understand English, and I
could practise my English. I think Turkey is a very cool place to visit. I had a great time and I’d like to
go back one day.
(Adapted from Active)
Task 1. What was Mai's opinion of these things? Tick (✓) the correct box in the table below.
good OK bad
flight
hotel
breakfast
weather
sightseeing
Grand Bazaar
Task 2. Order the activities in Mai’s blog.
______ a. We walked through the bazaar.
______ b. I took a lot of photos.
______ c. We flew to Istanbul.
______ d. I had breakfast.
______ e. We visited the mosque.
______ f. We got a taxi to the hotel.
______ g. We walked into the centre.
V. Read the text, and do the following tasks.
The Dominican Republic
Richard:
Hi, I’m planning 1 ____________ trip to the
Dominican Republic later this year. I’d love to know where to go, what to see, etc. Any ideas welcome.
Sunshine90:
Hi, Richard
2
You’ll have ____________ extremely fantastic time. The Dominican Republic is beautiful. Go to
Jarabacoa. It’s got 3 ____________ great climate. 4 ____________ temperature is between 16°C and
22°C all year. That’s why a lot of people call it “ 5 ____________ Everlasting Spring” because it’s always
spring time there. There’s 6 great festival in February with music and dancing and it’s close to Pico
Duarte, the highest mountain in 7 ____________ Caribbean. It’s 3,098 metres high but you can walk
to the top. It takes about three days and you have to go with someone who knows 8 ____________
area. There are 9 ____________ places to sleep on the mountain but you need warm clothes because
it’s very cold at night.
Fred_dilling:
Hi Richard
If you like history, spend a few days in 10 ____________ capital, Santo Domingo. Columbus came here
11
in 1492 and there are a lot of beautiful old buildings. It’s ____________ big city – two million people
12
live here so there is a lot to do. Come between February and April. That’s ____________ “dry”
13 14
season (but bring ____________ coat because it’s always rainy here!) Try ____________ local
food. The best is 15 ____________ La Bandera. It is meat, red beans, and rice. It’s lovely.
(Adapted from Studio)
Task 1. Complete the text with a/an, the or zero article ().
Task 2. Tick () the five things that the people talk about and cross () the three that they don't talk
about.
1. National parks  2. The climate 
3. Clothes to wear  4. Animals and birds 
5. A town to visit  6. Good hotels to stay in 
7. A festival  8. Something to eat 
Task 3. Read the text again and complete the notes.
Jarabacoa
Temperature: from 16°C to 1 _______________________
People often call it: 2 _______________________
Pico Duarte
How high: 3 _______________________metres
Time you need to walk to the top: 4 _______________________
Santo Domingo
Population: 5 _______________________
Things to see: 6 _______________________
Other things
Best time to come to the Dominican Republic: 7 _______________________
Food and drink: La Bandera is a dish of 8 _______________________
VI. Read the passage, and do the following tasks.
Costa Rica
Costa Rica, which means “Rich Coast”, has beautiful beaches, amazing animals and friendly people.
You can walk in a rainforest, go hiking up an active volcano, go white-water rafting on a mountain
river and swim or surf in the Pacific or Caribbean. Two million tourists visit this small Central American
country every year and Costa Rica is the world’s best place for eco-tourism with thirty-two national
parks.
Fast Facts
Population: 4 million
Area: 51,000 sq km (30% is protected)
Animals: monkeys, sloths, sea turtles and lots of birds Happy and green: Costa Rica is first in the
Happy Planet Index. It has the happiest people and is one of the “greenest” countries in the world.
Climate: The summer season is from May to October. It rains a lot and is very hot. The winter is from
November to April, and it is sunny and dry.
Coffee: This is the national drink and is the best coffee in the world.
Traveller’s Blog
Puerto Viejo
We are relaxing here on the Caribbean. Puerto Viejo is a port and surf town, so we love it! We go to
the beach every morning by bike (they are cheap to rent). Yesterday, we went to the Cahuita National
Park - the monkeys are amazing, and I took some great photos!
Leaving Costa Rica
I am in San José, the capital, and I am leaving tomorrow. The best things in my three weeks here?
White-water rafting on the Pacuarc River and visiting Tortuguero National Park by boat - I saw the sea
turtles. They are really cool.
(Source: Internet)
Task 1. Complete the notes:
Location: ___________________________________________________________
Population: ___________________________________________________________
National drink: ___________________________________________________________
Type of tourism: ___________________________________________________________
Things you can do: ___________________________________________________________
Best time to go: ___________________________________________________________
Places you can visit: ___________________________________________________________
Animals you can see: ___________________________________________________________
Task 2. Decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Correct the false statements.
1. Costa Rica is in Central America.
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. The capital is Puerto Viejo.
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. Costa Rica is a big country.
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. It is a good place for a holiday.
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. It has got interesting animals and birds.
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. It has got a lot of national parks.
__________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Read the text carefully, and then do the tasks that follow.
BLOG
PUBLISHED 08 JAN /////// READ ALL 17 COMMENTS
We have just come home after an amazing two weeks in South America. Now I’m back at school and
it’s really cold but I won’t forget the best holiday of my life. I’ll upload some photos soon.
1. ___________________________________________
My mum and dad hate winter. They wanted to go somewhere warm in December, and have a very
special holiday. Mum loves animals and dad loves surfing. They surfed the Net for holiday ideas, but
they didn’t know the best place to go. (i) _______ I knew what to do.
2. ___________________________________________
I went on the Internet and looked for people’s opinions about holidays. People write about
everything, (ii) _______ I soon found the perfect place: South Africa.
3. ___________________________________________
We left England on 21 December. It was winter here but summer there. It was fantastic. Mum saw
lions, giraffes, elephants and other animals, (iii) _______ Once in the Atlantic Ocean and once in the
Indian Ocean. And I went white-water rafting on the Orange River.
4. ___________________________________________
My parents were very pleased because I had a lot of gadgets with me. Dad’s camera hasn’t got a big
memory. On the first day, he took 180 photos, (iv) _______ On the second day, my mum borrowed
my e-book reader. On the third day, she spent £5 on a phone call to my grandparents, ( v) _______
She used my net book. Dad used my smart phone to get news about surfing and beaches in South
Africa.
(Adapted from i-Discover)
Task 1. Match the headings (A-E) with the paragraphs (1-4). There is one extra heading.
A. Meeting the local people ____
B. Where to go on holiday? ____
C. Useful things to take ____
D. Holiday activities ____
E. Online research ____
Task 2. Read the text again. Match the sentences (1-6) with the gaps in the text (i-vi). There is one
extra sentence.
1. I put them on my net book. ____
2. That’s when they asked me for help. ____
3. They enjoyed that a lot. ____
4. They tell you the good things and the bad. ____
5. The next evening she used Skype. ____
6. Dad went surfing twice. ____
VIII. Read the texts, and do the tasks that follow.
Travelers’ Tales
 Leo
I climbed the Eiffel Tower today. Actually, that isn’t completely true because you can’t climb to the
top. I walked up the 1,060 steps to the second level and then I got into the lift. The views of Paris
were disappointing because it was cloudy. I took some photos anyway, but they were rubbish.
 Pablo & Sara
We had a weird experience today. We floated in the Dead Sea. There’s so much salt in the water that
you can’t swim. Before getting in, we put mud over our bodies. When it was dry, we got into the
water. It was lovely and warm, but Sara got some salt in her eye. Poor thing! It really hurt.
 Meg & Joe
We got up at dawn this morning. We met our guide, Jacques, and then got into his jeep. He drove us
into the safari. After 30 minutes, we stopped. We waited in silence and then suddenly we saw about
25 elephants. They were only metres from us. It was amazing. We took some fantastic photos.
 Vera
It was my first trip in a helicopter, so I was very nervous when we left Las Vegas. Forty-five minutes
later, we flew over the Grand Canyon. It was awesome! Then we landed in the canyon. We got out of
the helicopter, walked around and had a picnic with some food and drink. It’s the best picnic place in
the world.
 Alicia
I walked over the Sydney Harbour Bridge with my family today. It wasn’t scary. You can’t take
anything onto the bridge (not even a camera), so we left our things in a locker, and we wore a special
suit. The guide took a photo of US when we got onto the top of the bridge.
(Adapted from Achievers')
Task 1. Where are the texts from?
A. some postcards B. a travel brochure
C. a geography book D. a social networking website
Task 2. Match the countries below with the texts.
Australia France Israel South Africa the USA
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Task 3. Read the texts again, and write the correct names for the questions.
1. Who got wet? ______________________________
2. Who put on different clothes? ______________________________
3. Who had bad weather? ______________________________
4. Who had something to eat? ______________________________
5. Who saw some wildlife? ______________________________
6. Who went by car? ______________________________
7. When went on foot? ______________________________
8. Who travelled by air? ______________________________
IX. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
Holiday Help
Are you leaving for the holiday of a lifetime soon, but you don’t know what you’re going to do when
you get there? Don’t worry! We’re here 24/7 to answer all your travel questions.
You asked...
I’m going to New Zealand with my parents and my sister. We’re flying to Auckland on North Island on
1st January and then we’re flying back to Christchurch on South Island on 1 st February. I’m so excited. -
Joanna
We answered ...
You’re going to spend a month in New Zealand - you’re so lucky! The best weather is in December,
January and February. Here are our suggestions.
North Island
Why not ask your parents to hire a campervan in Auckland and then drive to Wellington in the south
of North Island? This is a great way to see the whole island. Just remember, your parents can’t park
the campervan at the side of the road overnight. You’ll need to find a campsite. For a bit of
excitement, why not jump 40 m from the Auckland Harbour Bridge? Under 10s can't do this and if
you’re under 14, make sure your parents are with you.
South Island
For a real adventure, do a walking tour or go horse riding in Nelson so you can see the stunning
scenery from The Hobbit and The Lord of The Rings films for yourself.
One thing’s for sure - you’re going to have a fantastic time!
(Adapted from Beyond)
Task 1. What is the purpose of the webpage?
A. to give information about New Zealand
B. to give holiday advice about New Zealand
C. to recommend different holidays in New Zealand
Task 2. Match the places to the island. Write North or South.
1. Auckland ______________
2. Christchurch ______________
3. Wellington ______________
4. Nelson ______________
Task 3. Read the webpage again and find words or phrases that match the definitions.
1. the best trip that you will ever have ______________
2. all day and all night ______________
3. an idea or a plan that you give someone to consider ______________
4. to pay to use something for a period of time ______________
5. very beautiful and impressive ______________
Task 4. Read the webpage again, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false). Correct the false
statements.
1. The webpage answers questions day and night.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Auckland and Christchurch are on North Island.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Joanna is going to spend a month in New Zealand.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. The weather from December to February is good.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Wellington is in the middle of North Island.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. If you’re under 14, you can’t jump from the Auckland Harbour Bridge.
___________________________________________________________________________________
X. Amelia has won a competition, and her prize is a long weekend away with three friends. Read
about the competition and answer the questions.
WIN A Long Weekend Away!
Rules of the competition
- The winner can go to one of these amazing places.
- You can go with three friends.
- You will be away for five days.
- You can go anytime in January.
- Your starting point is London.
- All expenses paid including: travel, accommodation, and food.
Sights and the city! Paris, France
From the Eifel Tower to Disneyland, from café to art galleries - there’s something for everyone in this
historic but modern city!
- Accommodation: self-catering apartment
- Travel from London: 2/2 hours by train
- Average January temperature: 3°C
Shopping and shows! New York, USA
From an unforgettable show with a backstage tour to some world-famous shops and a city that never
sleeps - you’ll love it!
- Accommodation: self-catering apartment
- Travel from London: 7 hours by plane
- Average January temperature: -3°C
Go and get lazy! Goa, India
A complete break from the stress of everyday life. Relax with unspoilt beaches, delicious food and
perfect sunshine.
- Accommodation: self-catering beach house
- Travel from London: 8 hours by plane
- Average January temperature: 32°C
Spanish spa special! Seville, Spain
Amazing spa break with unlimited health and beauty treatments, swimming pool, beautiful scenery
and delicious food!
- Accommodation: 3 hotel
- Travel from London: 3 hours by plane
- Average January temperature: 8°C
Something for everyone! Dubai, UAE
You stay in a huge new hotel. You go shopping in a huge new shopping centre. You sunbathe on a
huge new beach. What more could you want?
- Accommodation: 5 hotel
- Travel from London: 7 hours by plane
- Average January temperature: 25°C
1. How much do they have to pay for their long weekend away?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. When do they have to go?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. How many nights will they stay?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. In which of the places do they stay in a self-catering apartment?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Which of the places do they get to by train?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. In which of the places will the weather be hot?
__________________________________________________________________________________
XI. Read the passage and answer the questions.
Central Viet Nam Heritage Tour - 4 Days, 3 Nights
- Enjoy beautiful beaches in Central Viet Nam
- Discover Hoi An Ancient Town with old construction
- Visit some famous tombs in Hue
Day 1: Da Nang - Son Tra - Hoi An (L, D)
Upon arrival, our driver will pick you up at the airport then driving to Son Tra Peninsular and enjoy the
whole beach city. A chance to see and swim at My Khe Beach. Have lunch in a local restaurant.
In the afternoon, we drive you to Hoi An Ancient Town - 40 km from Da Nang city. Check in the hotel.
Have dinner in a local restaurant. Overnight in Hoi An.
Day 2: Hoi An - Hue (B, L, D)
Breakfast at hotel. This morning you make a walking tour around Hoi An Ancient Town for more
exploration with old constructions: the Japanese Covered Bridge, Sa Huynh Museum, Tan Ky Old
House... Have lunch at a restaurant.
After lunch, you leave Hoi An for Hue City. On the way have a stopover and enjoy Hai Van Pass, relax
at Lang Co Beach. Arrive in Hue, check in the hotel. Have dinner at a restaurant. Overnight at a hotel.
Day 3; Hue City tour full day (B, L, D)
Breakfast at the hotel. This morning you will visit Minh Mang Tomb, Khai Dinh Tomb or Tu Due Tomb
to discover the unique architecture of Royal mausoleums. Have lunch at a restaurant.
In the afternoon, we visit the Citadel where 13 Nguyen Kings - the final dynasty in Viet Nam - reigned.
Visit the Noon Gate, Thai Hoa Palace, and then Thien Mu Pagoda. Back to the city centre and have
dinner at a restaurant. Overnight al the hotel.
Day 4: Hue Departure (B)
After breakfast in the hotel. You have free time until you leave Hue City. Our driver will pick you up to
the airport. End of the tour.
(Source: Internet)
1. What can tourists do during the tour?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What places will they visit on the first day?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What places will they visit during a walking tour around Hoi An Ancient Town?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What landscapes will they enjoy on the way from Hoi An to Hue?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. What places will tourists visit in Hue?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. On which days will they have all breakfast, lunch, and dinner?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
XII. Read the passage and do the tasks that follow.
Son Doong Cave in Viet Nam - Good Morning America
Son Doong Cave and Swallow Cave (En Cave) were recorded and broadcast on Good Morning
America - a programme of ABC Television (USA). By being broadcast on Good Morning America (ABC
Television), Son Doong Cave would be introduced widely to international travellers.
This is a good chance for Quang Binh tourism to promote the image of Son Doong - the biggest
cave in Viet Nam - to travellers around the world. Therefore, the film crew worked in the most
favourable conditions. The programme was directly broadcast on satellite in May 2015.
The cave is a part of the underground system connecting over 150 other caves in Viet Nam
near Viet Nam - Lao border with many caves such as Phong Nha Cave.
Son Doong Cave is compared equally to Mount Everest in terms of attraction. The biggest
natural cave in the world is appreciated to be an interesting destination for a several-day tour,
including exploring underground rivers, caves and camping... The overwhelming natural landscapes
inside Son Doong Cave create an attraction by majestic and magnificent scenes. It takes months to
end up a cave's round. In addition, the condition to join tours in Son Doong Cave is extremely high.
Adventurers must be in good mental and physical health to conquer the cave. Son Doong, the biggest
cave in Viet Nam, along with other attractions in Quang Binh, is an attractive destination of travelers,
especially those who are fans of natural exploration. The first exploration tour was held in early
August 2013. The first tour consisted of 6 people from the US, Russia, Australia, and Norway. They
underwent 7 days and 6 nights to explore Son Doong Cave. There are a large number of tourists
registering next tours since then.
(Source: Internet)
Task 1. Identify whether the statements are true (T), or false (F). Correct the false statements.
Statements T F
1. Thanks to the programme of Good Morning America on ABC Television, a large  
number of people around the world will know Son Doong Cave.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
2. The film crew making the programme about the cave met a lot problems from the  
local authorities.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
3. There are many caves in Quang Binh province, but Son Doong Cave may be the  
most well known.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
4. The number of people climbing Mount Everest is the same as that exploring Son  
 Doong Cave.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
5. The exploration tour of Son Doong Cave is so hard that it requires tourists to have  
good physical and mental health.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
6. Tourists can explore the cave in several months.  
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Task 2. Read the passage again and answer the questions.
1. When was the programme about Son Doong Cave on Good Morning America broadcast?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. What can be found in the underground system in Quang Binh province?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. In which aspect is Son Doong Cave compared to Mount Everest?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. What activities can tourists do in the cave?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. When was the first exploration tour held?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. How long did the first group of tourists spend in the cave?
__________________________________________________________________________________
XIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Mui Ne is located 24 kilometres northeast of Phan Thiet city. It is a fishing village as well as a
familiar tourism area in Binh Thuan province. 1 ________ lovely scenery of swaying coconut trees, Mui
Ne, meaning “sheltered peninsula”, is one of the famous and popular holiday 2 ________ in the world
with 15-kilometre strip of resorts along the beach.
Thanks to the shallow and slopped beaches, the blue and clean water, nice sun rarely behind the
clouds and cliffs battered by the waves of the sea, sometimes Mui Ne is 3 ________ Hawaii of Viet
 4
Nam. The beaches are fantastic with activities such as surfing and kitesurfing. But the most
________ scenery at Mui Ne is 5 ________ lines of golden sand which is called “Sand Dunes” by local
people. The sand is always moving because of the wind and looks like moving waves from afar and
that is 6 ________ the dunes never 7 ________ the same. The scenery is more fascinating at dawn.
Mui Ne is really a good 8 ________ for those who are interested in photography.
There are also many interesting sites at Mui Ne such as Po Sah Inu Tower, the ancient Cham
building that was built in the 8 th century, some workshops 9 ________ fish sauce. Mui Ne market and
fishing harbour are also a good chance 10 ________ daily life of local fishermen.
(Source: Internet)
1. A. For B. With C. Through D. In
2. A. destinations B. places C. camps D. seasons
3. A. regarded B. found C. judged D. considered
4. A. attraction B. attracted C. attractive D. attracting
5. A. moved B. moving C. changed D. changing
6. A. reason B. the reason C. reason why D. the reason why
7. A. look B. look at C. look like D. look for
8. A. perfect B. best C. ideal D. wonder
9. A. make B. makes C. made D. making
10. A. to discover B. for discovering C. discovering D. to be discovered
XIV. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question.
Taking a Working Holiday
One of the more difficult things young people face when they want to travel is the lack of
funds. During summer holidays and possibly at weekends, they are able to take on part-time jobs, but
the money they make is just a drop in the bucket of what they need to travel far away. For example,
traveling to Australia from Viet Nam can be quite expensive just for an airline ticket, and to a lot of
students wanting to travel, it can seem out of reach.
For students wanting to travel to Australia and New Zealand in particular, however, they are in
luck. Although many countries offer working holidays, these two countries are well-known for offering
them. When a young person signs up to get a working holiday visa, he only pays for the round-trip
airfare to get to either place and only needs to carry some extra cash for incidentals. Once he is there,
a job awaits where he can earn some money.
Many of the jobs require little or no experience, such as picking fruit or working in a busy pub
out in the countryside. Some of the jobs require more experience than most people are unlikely to
have, such as being a certified welder to work for eight weeks on a farm. That shouldn’t discourage
you, though, because there is always something to be found if you search hard enough.
There are many websites that advertise working holidays in Australia and New Zealand. If you
have the courage and are looking for a way to make a little money and see the world, it might be just
the ticket you were looking for.
(Source: Internet)
1. What can seem out of reach for young people?
A. Being able to find a part-time job
B. Being able to travel
C. Being able to get time off from school
D. Being able to earn money
2. Which students are in luck according to the passage?
A. The ones who want to go to Australia and New Zealand
B. The ones who have part-time jobs
C. The ones who have airline tickets
D. The ones who are on holiday
3. Where can people find working holidays advertised?
A. in magazines B. On the radio
C. In travel guidebooks D. On the Internet
4. According to the passage, which statement is true?
A. Some working holidays are not paid.
B. People on working holidays must be from Australia or New Zealand
C. A young person needs a special visa to go on a working holiday.
D. Picking fruit is the only job available for young people on working holidays.
5. Why would a student NOT want to take a working holiday?
A. To earn money B. To show how fearful he is
C. To see the world D. To visit a new place
XV. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question.
 Okinawa: A Fine Japanese Holiday Destination
Japan is known as the Land of the Rising Sun, and the red spot on the nation’s flag symbolizes
the sun. It is an island nation made up of a large archipelago, and each of the numerous islands has its
own flavour. Depending on the season, there is always something to be offered for visitors. If you
want to experience big city life, definitely head to Tokyo. If you want unspoiled beauty and four full
seasons, head northward to Hokkaido. However, if you want the place where you can find summer
year-round, then Okinawa is going to be your destination of choice.
Okinawa, the southernmost island prefecture of Japan, boasts more than just sandy beaches
and incredible seafood. It also has a culture and history that is quite different from the rest of Japan. It
is a place where the islanders live some of the longest lives on the earth, and it is also where great
battles were fought during World War II. However, today it is a travel destination in Japan that is by
far one of the best and most worth visiting.
While Okinawa is the main island in this prefecture, there are others that you can travel to.
Miyako Island and Kume Island are two great spots to find quiet, beautiful beaches. On all of the
islands, you can also try Okinawa speciality foods such as sweet potato dishes and soba, a special type
of noodle soup. Many of the dishes are low in fat and low in salt, and their health effects are well-
known. After all, more people in Okinawa live to over 100 years old than anywhere else on the Earth.
(Source: Internet)
1. Where might a person go for four full seasons?
A. Kume Island B. Hokkaido C. Miyako Island D. Okinawa
2. Why do people in Okinawa live long lives?
A. Because of their long history
B. Because of the battles that were fought there
C. Because of their diet
D. Because of having four full seasons
3. Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?
A. Tokyo offers the big city life.
B. Hokkaido is located in the north with four full seasons.
C. Okinawa dishes are low in fat and salt.
D. Sweet potatoes and soba are speciality foods of Hokkaido.
4. What can we infer about Okinawa?
A. People there live longer than those in every other place on the Earth.
B. There are many historical sites that can be visited all year round.
C. It is better known for its natural beauty than Hokkaido.
D. It has a greater population than Tokyo.
5. What does the word “prefecture” in paragraph 2 mean?
A. an island B. landscapes
C. a local government area D. a concentration of local residents
XVI. Read the magazine guide. Put each phrase in the correct place. There is one phrase that you do
not need.
a. I like to know where I am
b. I’m terrible at doing mathematical calculations
c. I have on my phone
d. I prefer the simple ones
e. I want to know what other people think
f. I use most while I’m travelling
Essential travel apps
The most useful apps on my phone are travel apps. Here’s a quick guide to the top five apps you
should have on your phone.
It’s essential to know what the weather is going to be like at your destination, so you have to install a
weather app. There are many apps available, but 1 _____________________ that give you a detailed
forecast for today and a general forecast for the week ahead.
2
____________________ so I always check my currency converter app to give me up-to-date
exchange rates. It’s very useful for shopping or for checking how much you are really paying to visit a
monument.
Some people enjoy getting lost on holiday, but 3 _____________________. My map app is probably
the app 4 _____________________. Apart from showing your current location, it can show you how
to get somewhere, or which shops and restaurants are nearby.
5
And while we’re talking about restaurants, don’t forget to install a review app.
___________________ before I walk into a restaurant. Many of these apps also provide a reservation
service.
Finally, if your airline has an app, put it on your phone. You can keep your boarding cards on your
phone and keep up to date with any changes or delays to your flight. Enjoy your trip.
(Adapted from Aim High)

E. Speaking
• Talking about your travel experience
I. Amelia from England has won a competition, and her prize is a long weekend away with three
friends. Amelia and one of her friends, Maria, are choosing where they want to go. Complete their
conversation, using the responses (A-H) given. (See Reading, Exercise X)
A. They are all quite far away, though.
B. And it’s quick to get there... only three hours.
C. Let’s see if Caroline and Julia agree with us.
D. I’d like to go somewhere hot, I think.
E. And Paris isn’t much warmer.
F. Where shall we go?
G. I’d rather stay in a hotel because self-catering is a lot of work.
H. What do you think of the spa break in Spain?
Amelia: Wow. This is so exciting. 1 __________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Maria: Well, let’s look at the options.
2
Amelia: ______________________________________________________________________
__________________________________. What about Dubai? Or Goa? I mean, I’d like
somewhere which will give us a break from the cold winter here in January! What do
you think?
Maria: Well, yes, that’s a good point. Somewhere hot would be nice.
3
Amelia: _____________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________. If possible, I’d rather go somewhere a
bit nearer because we’re only going for five days. All the hot places are far away and
it’ll take ages to get there.
Maria: True. But I don’t want to go to New York. Look, it’s minus three degrees!
4
______________________________________________________________________
Amelia: No, I don’t like the cold much either. 5 ________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Maria: Mmm... That sounds lovely.
Amelia: Yes, it sounds great. It’s not very hot, but at least it’s relaxing.
6
______________________________________________________________________
Maria: And it’s a three-star hotel... which is good. Would you like to stay in a hotel?
Amelia: Of course. 7 _____________________________________________________________
___________________________________ “Spanish Spa Special” then... Do you agree?
Marla: Yes! Fantastic... 8 _________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
● Everyday English: Expressing obligation
II. Read the situations. Then make conversations to express obligation and responding to it.
1. At the gate of the zoo, the security tells the man that it’s a rule to buy a ticket for a child over six
years old, the man says that his girl is only five years old.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
2. The teacher tells her students to respect the property and equipment of the school and others, and
students make a promise.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
3. The policeman asks a group of young men to stop when the traffic light is red, and they agree.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
4. The tour guide tells the campers to build campfires within the built fireplaces according to the
rules, and all of them agree.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
5. The mother tells the babysitter to call the police if a stranger knocks on the door but doesn’t go
away.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________

F. Writing
● Writing a paragraph introducing a tour
Write a paragraph introducing a one-day tour of Tam Coc, Ninh Binh. Use the cues below.
- first take one of the regular buses: reach the city of Ninh Binh from Ha Noi
- from Ninh Binh: need a taxi to take you to the destination
- the Ninh Binh region: well-known for its limestone mountain scenery, Tam Coc is home to some of
the best
- visitors: see this landscape of mountains and rice terraces (floating down a river in a small boat)
- during the cruise: see not only breathtaking landscape, but also temples and shrines
- as you float down the river: will pass through three flooded caves with low stone ceilings
- also possible to explore Tam Coc by bike, ride between rice fields, enjoy the quiet, rural life
Tam Coc, "Ha Long Bay On Land" is one of the most beautiful one-day tour from Ha Hoi. You first
______
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 1 (UNIT 8)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. item B. itinerary C. initial D. ideal
2. A. agency B. graveyard C. famous D. application
3. A. estimate B. terraced C. recent D. domestic
4. A. natural B. historic C. site D. tour
5. A. examination B. fixed C. example D. exact
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. We planned our _________________ several weeks before the trip.
A. way B. course C. itinerary D. path
7. Sa Pa is a popular holiday _________________ in Viet Nam.
A. destination B. goal C. camp D. arrival
8. I can recommend the chicken in mushroom sauce - it is _________________.
A. delightful B. pleasing C. rare D. delicious
9. Here are some tips and advice to help holidaymakers have _________________ and safe holiday.
A. fun B. funny C. relaxed D. attractive
10. Hostels are a temporary solution until the families can be housed in permanent
_______________.
A. settlement B. accommodation C. place D. comfort
11. Referring to Mu Cang Chai in Yen Bai, people think of _________________ rice fields stretching
like stairs to the sky.
A. hanging B. raised C. steep D. terraced
12. We must ensure that _________________ develops in harmony with the environment.
A. holidaymaker B. tourist C. tourism D. travel agency
13. You can book the cheapest _________________ flights to various destinations in our country via
online apps like Traveloka.
A. domestic B. household C. inside D. routine
14. Another natural _________________ of Da Lat is that the city appears with many colours in the
sunrise.
A. elegance B. attraction C. beauty D. look
15. Children can visit and explore the animal world in the natural environment at the three
___________ parks in Quy Nhon, Nghe An and Phu Quoc.
A. marine B. game C. amusement D. safari
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
sites activities paradise coastline
beauty experience beaches destinations
Beach Tours
16
With a long _________________ of 3,260 kilometres, Viet Nam has a lot of beautiful beaches to
develop beach tours. Specifically, Nha Trang is the beautiful beach city of Viet Nam with the two most
famous 17 _________________ including Ninh Van Bay and Binh Lap. Therefore, it is such a pity if you
do not visit these places during your tours. As for Ninh Van Bay, it is 60 kilometres from Nha Trang. It
18
owns a wonderful natural _________________ with blue beaches, white sandbanks, and a large
number of luxurious resorts. Certainly, it is an ideal place to swim and relax on a hammock on the
beach. The other place is Binh Lap, which is compared to the Maldives of Viet Nam. Visiting this place,
you will be fascinated by enjoying plenty of fresh seafood, taking a lot of photos and participating in a
19
lot of fun _________________, such as surfing, kayaking, scuba diving, and snorkelling. It will
promisingly be a memorable 20 _________________ in your lifetime.
IV. Choose the correct answer to complete each of the following sentences.
21. Can you find a place _________________ is suitable for all of us?
A. which B. where C. in which D. when
22. At the end of the nineteenth century, Binet developed a test for measuring intelligence
__________ served as the basic modern IQ tests.
A. has B. it has C. and D. which has
23. The television, _________________ so long been a part of our culture, has an enormous
influence.
A. has B. it has C. which D. which has
24. The girl _________________ mother I was talking to has left the room.
A. whose B. who C. whom D. that
25. There was a storm _________________ I had never experienced before.
A. such as B. as which C. which D. for which
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Viet Nam is a country with a 26 _________________ history and culture, stunning natural beauty, and
a 27 _________________ range of activities to offer visitors. 28 _________________ you are interested
in exploring ancient temples, hiking through lush rainforests, or relaxing on beautiful beaches. Viet
Nam has something for everyone. If you are looking for a great way to experience the best of Viet
29
Nam, consider taking a tour. There are a variety of tours _________________, so you can find one
that 30 _________________ your interests and budget.
Cultural tours explore Viet Nam’s traditional history and culture. You will visit ancient temples,
pagodas, and villages, and learn about the country’s 31 _________________ customs and traditions.
32
Adventure tours offer a chance to experience the natural beauty of Viet Nam. You will hike
_________________ rainforests, go kayaking on rivers, and explore caves.
33 34
Food tours take you on a journey through Viet Nam’s delicious _________________. You will
_________________ traditional dishes from different 35 _________________ of the country, and learn
about the country’s culinary history.
No matter what your interests are, you are sure to find a great tour that will help you explore the best
of Viet Nam.
(Source: Internet)
26. A. wealthy B. rich C. worth D. luxurious
27. A. diverse B. various C. assorted D. different
28. A. Surely B. Even if C. Either D. Whether
29. A. accessible B. available C. usable D. obtainable
30. A. agrees B. applies C. relates D. fits
31. A. single B. individual C. unique D. different
32. A. by B. inside C. between D. through
33. A. kitchen B. table C. cuisine D. menu
34. A. try B. attempt C. decide D. investigate
35. A. areas B. surroundings C. neighbourhoods D. regions
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Viet Nam is a paradise for all people to spend their holidays with friends or families. The most popular
tours for teenagers are backpacking, family holidays or adventure tours.
Backpacking is something that all travelling lovers should experience at least once in their lifetime.
Backpacking means carrying a few belongings and setting off for months to explore several places in a
region or country. Most people do it cheaply by staying in places like hostels and working while they
travel for months. However, you can also do it in luxury if you have enough money to afford it. Some
activities that a backpacking holiday would include are visiting different destinations, hiking, camping,
exploring nature and wildlife, and experience different cultures.
Family holidays are trips that are done for a family with parents, children, and other family members.
It is a time that helps the family relax and create incredible memories. However, it can be difficult to
cater to everyone’s preferences when going on this type of holiday. They can choose family-friendly
hotels, family nighttime entertainment, and take part in family activities in zoos, theme parks or
waterparks. Family tours can be expensive, so you should discover cheap flights and cheap
accommodation.
An adventure holiday is an action-packed holiday that would be thrilling and advantageous. It helps
push people out of their comfort zone by doing activities that would excite or thrill people, taking
them to the extreme. An adventure holiday includes outdoor activities, hiking, mountain biking, multi-
sport adventures and so on.
(Source: Internet)
36. Backpacking can help tourists save money because _________________.
A. they explore several places in a region or country
B. they can stay at cheap places like hostels
C. they explore nature and wildlife, and experience different cultures
D. they can also do it in luxury if they can
37. Backpacking is the best option for people who like _________________.
A. travelling on their own to visit different places
B. doing extreme sports and thrilling activities
C. enjoying comfort with family members
D. travelling in luxury because they have enough money to afford it
38. For a family holiday, it is difficult to _________________.
A. create and keep incredible memories
B. take part in activities in zoos, theme parks or waterparks
C. discover cheap flights and cheap accommodation
D. satisfy everyone’s tastes during the holiday
39. All of the following are true about an adventure holiday EXCEPT that _________________.
A. people are pushed to do thrilling activities
B. it would be thrilling and advantageous
C. people should have a sense of adventure to take part in it
D. it includes a variety of outdoor activities and sports
40. The word "‘action-packed” in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to _________________.
A. packing enough equipment for activities
B. ready to take action
C. full of fun activities
D. full of fun and pleasure
VII. Complete the conversation about a tour to Mui Ne, using the responses (A-G) given. There are
two extra ones.
A. And the Red Sand Dunes are just a couple of kilometres from the centre and can be reached
on foot as well.
B. Actually, this stream is surrounded by amazing limestone formations.
C. Go to the White Sand Dunes, hire a quad bike, and enjoy a ride yourself.
D. There is no shortage of things to do in Mui Ne but it is easy to spend relaxing days at your
hotel’s beach.
E. Mui Ne is absolutely magical at sunrise and sunset.
F. It was a wonderful holiday, I think.
G. Only a few tourists try the Fairy Stream because they think it’s a tourist trap.
Chau: Hi, Nick. How are things? Have you made up your mind about where to spend your long
weekend holiday?
Nick: My family is going to Mui Ne in Binh Thuan province. Did you go there last year?
41
Chau: Yes. We stayed there for four days.
_______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Nick: We’re going to spend only three days there in a resort. I’ve read several brochures to know
interesting things to do during our holiday. Can you share your experiences in Mui Ne?
Chau: Besides swimming or even scuba-diving, there are a lot of activities you can do there.
42
___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: Sounds very exciting. When we are on a quad bike, we can enjoy the sights of the dunes, and
even the bumps. I think my father can ride it. How far are they?
Chau: About 25 kilometres from the centre of Mui Ne. Sand dunes make you feel like you are in a
desert right next to the beach.
Nick: We feel as if we were in the Sahara Desert. It’s really my cup of tea. Anything else?
Chau: I see. 43 _______________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Nick: The Fairy Stream? Why do they think so?
44
Chau: ___________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________. You make your way through colourful limestone
formations, warm water, and bright green trees to reach a waterfall.
Nick: Is it a muddy stream? I think we have to carry our shoes along with us.
45
Chau: You’re right. Are you fond of taking photos?
________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Everything is glorious in sunlight.
Nick: I’ll get up early and take some photos at sunrise. Anyway, can we go cycling there?
Chau: I suggest renting a bike and exploring a number of isolated beaches. Hon Rom Beach is the
most favourite.
Nick: How far is it from Mui Ne, Chau?
VIII. Write a paragraph introducing a one-day tour to Cham Island from Hoi An. Use the cues below,
and insert the appropriate words of sequence (First, Then,...).
The Best Cham Island Snorkelling Tour
This is the itinerary for a one-day tour to Cham Island from Hoi An.
46. coach driver: collects you at your hotel in Hoi An Town center, take you to Cua Dai pier; get on the
boat and reach the Marine Protected Areas of Cham Island in two hours
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. spend one hour snorkelling: under the supervision of a guide (full equipment provided)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. a break on the beach: water, coffee, tea and snack; go to your second snorkelling spot to see
colourful coral reef and fish
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. in the afternoon: return to the boat, leave for Bai Chong beach (lunch and rest); enjoy delicious
lunch on the beach
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. after lunch: relax on the beach with free hammocks; get on the boat to come back to Hoi An
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 2 (UNIT 8)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. season B. area C. seafood D. team
2. A. package B. advantage C. travel D. capital
3. A. delicious B. require C. destination D. expensive
4. A. include B. decide C. recent D. notice
5. A. estimate B. smooth C. cost D. tourism
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Travel _____________ can provide a wide range of services and benefits to tourists, making their
trip itinerary and experience more enjoyable.
A. destinations B. guides C. markets D. agencies
7. A(n) ___________ ticket provides access to Hoi An's ancient town and some of its cultural
attractions.
A. entrance B. season C. return D. first-class
8. Whether or not we go to Japan for our holiday depends on the _____________ of the tour.
A. amount B. charge C. cost D. expense
9. The tour operator will arrange transport and plan our _____________.
A. programme B. itinerary C. trail D. direction
10. He spent an hour _____________ for all the necessary documents.
A. hunting B. chasing C. shooting D. pursuing
11. _____________ the time it will take to complete the task.
A. Judge B. Approve C. Recognise D. Estimate
12. Firefightersthe _____________ buildings for survivors.
A. investigated B. explored C. searched D. looked up
13. There are a handful of ancient ruinous _____________ in North Viet Nam, like the Ha Noi Citadel
and the Co Loa Citadel, well worth visiting.
A. sites B. positions C. stations D. districts
14. We can rearrange the dates of our holiday - nothing is _____________ yet.
A. solid B. rigid C. fixed D. packed
15. They are introducing new measures to ensure the _____________ running of the business.
A. flat B. smooth C. constant D. regular
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
sites homestays beauty choice
place landscape paradise attraction
Sightseeing tours
This type of tours is a wise 16 _____________ for foreign tourists when they visit Viet Nam and its two
prominent destinations are Sa Pa and Da lat. First, Sa Pa is a tourist destination more than 30
kilometers far from the centre of Lao Cai City. Located at an average altitude of 1,500 metres above
17
the sea level, Sa Pa Town seems to be a cloudy _____________ and have cool weather all year
round. Also, Sa Pa has a large number of wonderful terraced rice fields, a lot of magnificent waterfalls
and a wide range of majestic mountains. Therefore, it is always an ideal 18 _____________ in Viet Nam
for tour packages that foreign tourists need. In the same way, Da Lat is always listed at the top of
most romantic places in Viet Nam to have a sightseeing tour. Not only does it attract a lot of foreign
19
tourists by its chilly weather but also by a variety of check-in _____________ such as True Lam
Pagoda, Da Lat Milk, Clay Tunner, Lam Vien Square, Da Lat Railway Station and so on. in addition,
20
there are a large number of _____________ with some lovely strawberry gardens and vintage
coffee shops. All in all, Da Lat is a must-go destination in your sightseeing tours in Viet Nam.
IV. Choose the correct answer to complete each of the following sentences.
21. _____________ was a liar.
A. Anyone that told you that story B. Those who told you that story
C. Who told you that story D. Someone who told you
22. Kate, _____________ with I studied in the secondary school, is now a famous surgeon.
A. that B. who C. whose D. whom
23. The people _____________ must be willing to commute a long distance to work.
A. wished to live in rural areas B. wished they live in rural areas
C. those wishing to live in rural areas D. who wish to live in rural areas
24. The plumber couldn’t remember where he’d left the box _____________ he kept his tools.
A. for whom B. in what C. in which D. of which
25. The girls and flowers _____________ he painted were vivid.
A. who B. that C. whose D. which
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
26
When visitors join in a _____________ of the Mekong Delta, they can visit Cai Rang Floating
Market to see the river life. Cai Rang Floating Market is 27 _____________ all day but it is busiest from
28
sunrise to about 9 a.m. The main items _____________ there are farm produce and specialties of
neighboring areas.
29
During the early morning market hours, larger sized boats anchor and create lanes so that
_____________ boats can move into and out of. The waterway becomes a maze of hundreds of
30
boats packed with mangoes, bananas, papaya, pineapple, and other goods. Sellers do not have to
_____________ their goods because their goods can be seen 31
_____________ and their cries
would not be heard in the vastness of the river and the noise of boat engines. Sellers tie their goods to
a tall pole 32
_____________ buyers can see from a distance 33
_____________ they are selling.
34
Each boat is loaded with plenty of seasonal goods. Activities at the market are also a(n)
_____________ for tourists to study the cultural 35 _____________ of southerners.
(Source: Internet)
26. A. tour B. trip C. voyage D. travel
27. A. to open B. open C. opened D. opening
28. A. sell B. are selling C. selling D. sold
29. A. no B. bigger C. smaller D. the same
30. A. cry B. cry out C. cry out for D. advertise
31. A. within distance B. in the distance C. in a distance D. by some distance
32. A. therefore B. but C. so that D. although
33. A. how far B. why C. how D. what
34. A. occasion B. event C. reason D. experience
35. A. appearances B. aspects C. guides D. subjects
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Situated on the central coast of Viet Nam, which is famous for many beautiful beaches. Lang Co
Beach, since June 2009, has become an official member of the “World’s most beautiful bays” club.
Today, it is a popular destination for tourists in Viet Nam, especially for those who love the beach so
much.
With the length of approximately 10 kilometres, Lang Co Beach located in Lang Co town, Phu Loc
district, Thua Thien- Hue province is next to the National Highway 1A and near Hai Van Pass.
Lying on the most beautiful curve of the country, Lang Co has almost everything that the nature can
offer: green mountains and tropical forests, smooth white sand, full of sunshine and cool, blue and
clear sea as crystal, and the average temperature of 25°C in summer, is an attractive destination for
both domestic and international tourists in Viet Nam. It is the third bay of Viet Nam, after Ha Long and
Nha Trang named in the list of 30 most beautiful bays in the globe.
It can be said that nobody can resist a nature beauty like Lang Co town. This small and peaceful town
will give you the most relaxing time and many games at the beach. In addition, you will have a good
time enjoying the seafood with various kinds of shrimps, lobster, crab, butter-fish, mackerel fish,
oysters, etC. and not far from the beach are some attractions such as Lang Co fishing village, Chan
May scenery.
Lying on the "Central Heritage Road", Lang Co is very close to other famous attractions such as the
Imperial City of Hue, Hoi An Ancient Town, Son Tra Peninsula where the famous Son Tra Natural
Reserve and beautiful beaches are located, and so many more.
(Source: Internet)
36. Lang Co beach is located _____________.
A. between Hoi An Ancient Town and Son Tra Peninsula
B. on the most beautiful curve of Viet Nam
C. 10 kilometres away from Hue
D. under Hai Van Pass
37. The most important reason why so many tourists come to Lang Co beach is that _____________.
A. it is the third most beautiful beach in Viet Nam
B. they can enjoy various kinds of seafood
C. they can come to the famous Son Tra Natural Reserve
D. it is considered an ideal place for beach lovers
38. All of the following are attractions of Lang Co Beach EXCEPT _____________.
A. the National Highway 1A next to it
B. smooth white sand, and full of sunshine
C. cool, blue and clear sea as crystal
D. its location on the "Central Heritage Road"
39. We can infer from the passage that Lang Co Beach.
A. is very hot during summer
B. is the most beautiful bay in the world
C. enjoys the harmony of nature and humans
D. is the first member of the “World's most beautiful bays” club in Viet Nam
40. Coming to Lang Co Beach, you can do all of the following activities EXCEPT _____________.
A. relaxing and joining in beach games
B. sunbathing on many beautiful beaches
C. visiting the nearby fishing village
D. enjoying seafood
VII. Complete the conversation about a tour to Sa Pa, using the responses (A-G) given. There are
two extra ones that you do not need.
A. You ride the cable car to experience the magnificent scenery and picturesque scenes of
Hoang Lien National Park.
B. Ban Pho Village is for a one-day trip, so arrive in the early morning.
C. You can understand Sa Pa’s interesting culture through a homestay arranged ahead of time.
D. On route, visitors can see the dying and weaving arts of the Hmong tribe.
E. There are many villages to visit but Ban Pho Village in Bac Ha district is the best.
F. If you hope to buy ethnic fabrics, explore stalls along the second floor.
G. It’s not for anyone expecting modern conditions, but it’s pleasant and tidy.
Janet: Guess what? I’m going to Sa Pa next week.
Mi: Great! I’ve been there twice.
Janet: Really? Have you got any tips for me? What are the things I shouldn’t miss in Sa Pa?
41
Mi: ___________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Janet: I think it’s interesting. My father hasn’t booked the rooms yet. I’ll talk to him later. But is it
comfortable?
42
Mi: Don’t worry about that.
________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Janet: What should we do first?
Mi: Go to the Silver Waterfalls, less than 15 kilometres from the town centre. You can see the falls
coming from the mountain top and the forest around.
Janet: I see. I heard that cable car system to Mount Fansipan was open.
Mi: That’s right. 43 _________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Janet: I’d like to visit a Hmong village. Can you recommend one?
44
Mi: _________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________. It’s here where the highlands form a beautiful
backdrop to the village.
Janet: And how about shopping? My mother likes shopping very much.
45
Mi: Sa Pa Market on Saturdays sells handicrafts and ethnic style clothing.
____________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Write a paragraph introducing a one-day tour to Cue Phuong National Park from Ha Noi. Use
the cues below.
One-day Tour to Cue Phuong National Park from Ha Noi
Cuc Phuong is the first national park in Viet Nam.
46. in the morning, around 7.30 a.m., the bus: pick you up at your hotel in Ha Noi centre and travel to
Ninh Binh
In the morning, around 7.30 a. m., the bus ________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. the coach: arrives at Cue Phuong National Park (11.30 a.m.), have a chance to visit Endangered
Primate Rescue Centre and the Botanical Garden for about an hour
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. lunch: at the park centre at 12.30 a.m.; 13.00: go to the centre of the park by car, about 20
kilometres through the primary forest
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. take part in mountainous trekking, go to the Ancient Tree or the one-thousand-year-old tree
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. 15.30: return to the gate of the national park, get back to Ha Noi
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
You will arrive in Ha Noi at 18.30, and we will drop you off at your hotel, and the tour ends.
 UNIT 9. ENGLISHES
A. Pronunciation
● Stress in words ending in -ion and -ity
I. Write the words below in the correct row, according to the stress pattern.
concentration necessity quality expression
publicity anxiety subtraction society
capacity priority appreciation communication
productivity decoration possession reality
quantity restriction accommodation variety
Ooo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
oOo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
oOoo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
ooOo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
ooOoo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
oooOo _____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
II. Mark the primary stress (’) in the underlined words, then read the sentences aloud.
1. The quality of the decoration is perfect.
2. The priority of the charity is improving the quality of poor children’s lives.
3. Online communication can be easier when we upgrade the capacity of the broadband transmission.
4. The residents showed their anxiety about the concentration of garbage in their neighbourhood.
5. The reality of the situation is that we should attract more publicity or the business has to close.

B. Vocabulary
• Aspects of languages & English language learning
I. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
 concentric official vocabulary exchange students immigrants
fluent bilingual mother tongue second language varieties
1. The majority of recent __________________ to the USA are from Mexico and Central America.
2. While on our programme, __________________ live with a volunteer host family and attend their
local high school.
3. The __________________ is the language one acquires after the first language.
4. Children naturally acquire their __________________ through exposure.
5. By the age of two a child will have a(n) __________________ of about two hundred words.
6. The article was about the different __________________ of Spanish spoken in South America.
7. In order to use this tool to draw __________________ circles on a map, you should give the radius,
and fill colours.
8. That __________________ woman can speak Spanish and English.
9. In the USA, English is the __________________ language and the government must do its business
in English.
10. I can make myself understood in English, but I’m not __________________.
II. Complete the gaps in the text with the words given below.
historical communication model importance level
concentric development majority spread native
The Expansion of English
Kachru’s model provides a way of looking at the expansion and use of the English language as a
second and as a foreign language. Kachru’s Three Circles of English is a(n) 1 _______________ that
categorises the use and 2 _______________ of the English language into three 3 _______________
circles. English has different uses in different countries and each “circle” refers to a group of countries
in which English has a similar 4 _______________ of importance.
We can group the ways in which people use English into three distinct categories:
- English is spoken as the mother tongue by the 5 _______________ of population.
- People speak a different 6 _______________ language, but English is used in the country as a second
language.
- English is used as a foreign language only for international 7 _______________.
The 8 _______________ of English in both official contexts and everyday life differs for countries in
 9
each category. This depends on a variety of factors including _______________ factors such as
British colonial relations and the 10 _______________ of technology during the Industrial Revolution.
III. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the verbs given below.
establish go over mean look up
borrow translate pick up copy
1. Can you help me _______________ this legal jargon into plain English?
2. Highlight the text you want and _______________ it to the clipboard.
3. How can you _______________ the word if you don’t know how to spell it?
4. She _______________ Spanish when she was living in Mexico.
5. Remember to _______________ your essay for grammar and spelling mistakes before you hand it
in to the teacher.
6. English has _______________ many words from French.
7. There is a strong need to _______________ effective communication links between the staff,
parents, and pupils.
8. The word “loch” in Scots _______________ “lake” in English.
IV. Complete the gaps in the text with the correct form of the verbs given below.
practise familiarize push write down pay
understand enrich expose try out pick
1
We can _______________ our vocabulary by reading a wide variety of English material such as
fiction and non-fiction novels, online blogs. We will 2 _______________ a range of words and phrases
and 3 _______________ ourselves with words that we may hear in conversations with friends.
4
Writing is also a great way to _____________ using different vocabulary and gives us the
opportunities to 5 _______ different sentences on paper before we start using these phrases in real
6
life conversations. Why don’t we try creating our own “English vocabulary book” where we can
_________ different words and phrases we think will be helpful in the future.
7
_______________ attention to conversation between English speakers on the bus, in the
supermarket or in the English-speaking clubs is one of the best ways to increase our English
8
vocabulary. This option allows us to hear different words and phrases in action so we can better
_______________ their meaning and use.
Just like listening to conversations in English, watching TV or films will help us see different phrases in
action in everyday conversations.
 9
If we are engaging with new people and _______________ ourselves to do new things and be in
different situations, it is likely that we will meet people who have varying vocabularies. By 10 ________
ourselves to these different ways of speaking, we have the chance to learn different words naturally.
• Borrowed words
V. Match the dining terms to their origins. Write the answers in the blanks.
1. hotel _______ A. the French word “salade” is for a dish made with a mix of raw
vegetables
2. appetite _______ B. the French word for “cake”, referring to a sweet, baked dessert
3. chef _______ C. “vinaigrette” is a French term for a type of cold sauce made with
vinegar, oil and various flavourings, often used as a salad dressing
4. salad _______ D. the French word “aperitif’ refers to a pre-dinner drink designed to
stimulate the desire to eat food
5. soup _______ E. a popular French and English dish made with a base of egg yolks
and beaten egg whites, combined with other ingredients, and then
baked to achieve a light, airy quality
6. vinegar _______ E. a popular French and English dish made with a base of egg yolks
and beaten egg whites, combined with other ingredients, and then
baked to achieve a light, airy quality
7. gateau _______ F. the French word “hotel” refers to an establishment offering
accommodation and often meals
8. souffle _______ G. the French term “soupe” is used for a liquid dish served hot or
cold, typically made from boiling a combination of ingredients
VI. Match the names of the vs states to their origins. Write the answers in the blanks.
1. Alabama _______ A. the Indian word “tejas” means “friends” or “allies”
2. Kansas _______ B. the Eskimo word “alakshak” means “peninsula” or “great lands”
3. Michigan _______ C. the native word “Owhyhee” means “Homeland”
4. Alaska _______ D. the name of the Alibamu tribe
5. Kentucky _______ E. the word “Michi Sepe” means “great river” or “father of waters”
because the Indians were aware of the immensity of the river
6. Mississippi _______ F. the word “mishigamaa” means “large lake”
7. Texas _______ G. the word “ida” means “salmon” and “ho” means “tribe” or
 “eaters”, so it means “salmon eaters”
8. Illinois _______ H. the name of the Kansa tribe
9. Hawaii _______ I. the word “Kentake” in the Native American means “meadow
land”, and it also means “land of tomorrow”
10. Idaho _______ J. the Indian word “illini” means “men” or “warriors” and it was
added with the French adjective ending “ois”
• British English & American English
VII. Complete the definitions with the British English words below. Then match them to their
American English equivalents.
British English
flat dustbin curtains cooker chest of drawers
garden lift tap torch wardrobe
American English
elevator dresser drapes closet apartment
faucet flashlight stove trash can yard
1. a _______________ is a piece of land next to a house where flowers and vegetables can be grown
2. a _______________ is a small light that you carry in your hand
3. a _______________ is a set of rooms used as a house
4. a _______________ is a machine used for carrying people from one floor to another
5. a _______________ is a piece of furniture with drawers that is used for storing clothes
6. a _______________ is a large container outside your house where you throw things away
7. a _______________ is a type of handle that you turn to let water out of a pipe
8. a _______________ is a large piece of kitchen equipment used for making meals
9. a _______________ is a cupboard where you can hang your clothes
10. _______________ are pieces of cloth that you can move to cover a window
VIII. Complete the sentences with the American English words in Exercise 1.
1. Don’t leave the kitchen if there’s a pan on the _______________.
2. Please hang your clean clothes in your _______________.
3. Shall we walk up the stairs or take the _______________.
4. The kids are outside playing in the _______________.
5. They live in a(n) _______________ on 23rd Street.
6. When is the _______________ emptied? It’s starting to smell.
7. The _______________ is leaking, so we’d better get a plumber in.
8. Do you have a(n) _______________? I can’t see a thing.
9. Your watch is probably on the _______________, where you left it.
10. The sun’s really bright today. Let’s close the _______________.
● Prepositions
IX. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. He is bilingual _______________ Mandarin and English.
2. Pronouns are often used to refer _______________ a noun that has already been mentioned.
3. The Internet is an increasingly important means _______________ communication.
4. _______________ a model of a ship, the mast is 9 cm high, while the mast of the actual ship is 12 m
high.
5. The museum’s collection includes works of art from all _______________ the world.
6. He provided us _______________ a lot of information.
7. We provide financial support _______________ low-income families.
8. I get a lot of pleasure _______________ reading books in English.
9. I was actually fairly confident _______________ my chances to get a scholarship.
10. Do you know any differences _______________ British and American English?

C. Grammar
• Defining relative clauses
I. Join the sentence halves with where, who. whose and which.
1. These are the boys ... a. you got yesterday?
2. Is there a shop in town ... b. I often spend time with.
3. Beach volleyball is something ... c. has got blue eyes.
4. I know a man ... d. I can buy a video game?
5. They are the parents ... e. child I sometimes look after.
6. Do you know the village ... f. I’d like to have a go at.
7. Can we watch the DVD ... g. Nick lives?
1. _________________________________________________________________________________
2. _________________________________________________________________________________
3. _________________________________________________________________________________
4. _________________________________________________________________________________
5. _________________________________________________________________________________
6. _________________________________________________________________________________
7. _________________________________________________________________________________
II. Connect the sentences with who, which or where.
1. I bought a new bag. It is made of recycled plastic.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. His mother is a doctor. She works at a hospital in Ho Chi Minh City.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Rebecca Hoskins is a British woman. She started a campaign against plastic bags.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. San José is a city in California. My uncle went to university there.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. We visited a market. We bought some oranges there.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Mary read a blog. It was about the life of a family in New York.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. It is an interesting film. It’s about life in space.
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. My English teacher is a man. He’s always cheerful.
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Combine the sentences using relative clauses.
1. Yersin is a private university. My brother studied medicine there.
 Yersin is the private university
2. Ms. Hoa is a dentist. She fixed my teeth.
 Ms. Hoa is the dentist
3. Barossa is a bar. You can get free food there.
 Barossa is a bar
4. Did you get my notes? I left it on your table.
 Did you get the note
5. My Music is a shop. It sells old CDs.
 My Music is the shop
6. Did you find the keys? I gave them to your sister.
 Did you find the keys
7. Mr. Tan is a personal trainer. He helped me get fit.
 Mr. Tan is the personal trainer
8. Binh Chanh is a town. I was born there.
 Binh Chanh is the town

D. Reading
• Reading about the three circles of English
I. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NG (not given). Tick the correct boxes.
How English has become the global language
People often talk about English as a global language. With more than 350 million people around the
world speaking English as the first language and more than 430 million speaking it as a second
language, there are English speakers in most countries around the world.
English is often called the international language of business. It is increasingly true as international
trade expands every year. Most multinational companies require a certain degree of English
proficiency from employees, so in order to get a position with a top company, more and more people
are learning English.
If your ambitions lie in science or technology, you can’t neglect English either. Much of the technical
terms are based on English words. If you want to learn about the latest developments and discoveries
from around the world, you will read them in journals and research reports published in English. Of
course, with good conversational English, you will be able to make important contacts at conferences
and seminars.
If you want a career in travel, English is absolutely essential. As the international language of aviation,
pilot and cabin crew all need to speak English. Even if you are not in the air, speaking English
accurately will ensure you are able to communicate with suppliers and customers all over the world.
With all the English resources available on the Internet and so many other English speakers around
the world to practise with, there has never been a better time to start learning English. Pick up a book,
learn a few words, or even start a course today and take your first steps toward becoming one of
nearly 800 million English speakers in the world.
(Source: Internet)
 Statements T F NG
1. There are more people using English as a second or foreign language than   
the number of native speakers of English.
2. Most documents or contracts in international business are in English.   
3. Directors of multinational companies are fluent in using English.   
4. People works in science and technology should not lie about their English   
skills.
5. Most of the technical terms are English words.   
6. Journals and research reports are mostly published in English.   
7. Most scientific conferences and seminars are very noisy because people   
speak Chinese all the time.
8. There are a lot of resources in English that are available on the Internet.   
9. Starting a course can make you become an English speaker.   
10. Learning English little by little can help you be able to speak English.   
II. Read the passage and answer the questions.
English plays an important role in everyday life in India. In India with innumerable regional languages
in different states, English serves as the common language in the country. Most office-goers know
English, but many of them do not know other languages besides their mother-tongue or regional
language. Thus, they communicate with each other in English for their everyday work.
The importance of English in education and student’s life cannot be denied. English remains a major
medium of instruction in schools. There are large numbers of books that are written in the English
language. English is an important language for inter-state communications. Modern India has many
large states. People of each state converse in their own language and often cannot speak or
understand the regional language of other people. In such cases, English becomes the link between
these people. So, we cannot deny the importance of English in modern India.
There are some advantages of regional languages over English, but in spite of that there is the need
for and importance of English in Indian life.
(Source: Internet}
1. What is the role of English in everyday life in India?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why is English chosen as the official language in India?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What do most office-goers use English for?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What is the role of English in education?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why is English considered the link between people in India?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NG (not given). Correct the false
ones.
All you need to know about English
If you were an alien and had time to learn only one language before your visit to the Earth, which
language would you choose? English, of course.
Why not Chinese?
If you were only interested in talking to native speakers, Chinese would definitely be a better choice.
About 1.4 billion people speak Chinese as their first language, compared with only 400 million who
speak English. However, Chinese wouldn’t help you very much if you weren’t in China, while you can
usually find an English translation at major tourist sites and airports all around the world. If you
needed information from the internet, English would be useful, too. About 56% of all webpages are in
English. What’s more, English is an official language in fifty-four different countries, which together
cover more than 28% of all the land on our planet.
So how many English speakers are there altogether?
About 1.8 billion, about a quarter of the world’s population. That includes native speakers, people
who are fluent speakers in countries where English is an official language, like India, Nigeria, and
Singapore, and all the people who have learned it as a foreign language at school.
What is English, anyway?
Several groups of people invaded England in the fifth century AD, from Germany and Denmark. We
now call them the Anglo-Saxons. English developed from the different Germanic dialects that they
spoke. Later, in the eleventh century, the Normans from northern France took control of England, and
about 10,000 French words became part of the English language. English also took lots of words from
Latin, and some words from ancient Greek and other languages.
How did it become such an important world language?
It started to spread around the world when British colonists went to live in North America in the
seventeenth century, and later in Australia, New Zealand, and South Africa. The British also took
control of parts of Asia, the Caribbean and Africa, and people there had to learn English. In the
twentieth century, the spread of English continued because people wanted to do business with the
USA. This was easier for people who spoke this country’s language: English.
Is English exactly the same around the world?
Not quite. American English has a few different spellings from British English, and a few small
differences in grammar. People around the world speak with many different accents, and slang words
are often different in different countries.
What's next for English?
If an alien were clever enough to reach the Earth, it would probably have amazing translation
technology, too, and wouldn’t have to learn any of our languages. However, it will be a long time
before our own technology can replace the need for language learning. English is becoming the main
language for lessons in more and more schools and universities around the world, because people
think that fluent English will be very important for young people when they look for jobs. In this
century, at least, English as a global language is here to stay.
(Source: Internet)
Statements T F NG
1. More people speak Chinese as their first language than English.
2. There are 1.8 billion people who speak English as their first language.
3. English is an official language in Nigeria.
4. The Normans often spoke in Latin.
5. British people went to live in South Africa in the sixteenth century.
6. New technology will soon mean that people don’t have to learn foreign
languages.
IV. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question.
Have you ever noticed advertisements which say “Learn a foreign language in 6 weeks, or your money
back. From the first day your pronunciation will be excellent. Just send....” and so on? Of course, it
never happens quite like that. One’s mother language is easier to learn, but it also requires a lot of
practice. And think how much practice that gets! Before the Second World War, people usually
learned a foreign language in order to read the literature of the country.
Now speaking a foreign language is what most people want. Every year many millions of people start
learning one. How do they do it? Some people try it at home, with books and records of tapes; some
use radio or television programmes; some use computers and the network; others go to evening
classes. If they use the language only 2 or 3 times a week, it will take a long time, like learning a
foreign language at school. A few people try to learn the language fast by studying for 6 or more
hours a day. It is clearly easier to learn the language in the country where it is spoken. However, most
people cannot afford this, and for many it is not necessary. They need the language in order to do
their work better. For example, scientists and doctors chiefly need to be able to read books and
reports in the foreign language. Whether the language is learned quickly or slowly, it is hard work.
Machines and good books will help, but they cannot do the student’s work for him.
(Source: Internet}
1. According to some advertisements, you ______________.
A. have to pay your money if you cannot master a foreign language in 6 weeks
B. needn’t pay your money if you cannot learn a foreign language in 6 weeks
C. must pay your money if you cannot master a foreign language in 6 weeks
D. will be paid much money if you cannot learn a foreign language in 6 weeks
2. Now most people try to learn a foreign language in order to ______________.
A. read the literature of the country
B. read books and reports
C. do their work better
D. go to foreign countries
3. The best way to learn a foreign language is ______________.
A. to go to the country where the language is spoken
B. to use machines and good books
C. to go to evening classes
D. to do as the advertisements tell you to
4. Learning a foreign language is a hard job ______________.
A. only for scientists and doctors
B. only for the students at school
C. for those people at home
D. for most people
5. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?
A. It is very difficult to learn a language, including the native language.
B. Few people can afford to learn a foreign language in the country where it is spoken.
C. To learn one’s mother tongue also needs a lot of practice.
D. Machines and good books are useless for us to learn a foreign language.
V. Read the following passage and do the tasks that follow.
Which English Will We Speak?
English is called an international language, but there are actually quite a few varieties of English that
exist around the world. English originated in England, but soon English spread to other countries, and
different varieties of English began to exist. Today, the countries in which English is spoken can be
divided into three groups.
The first group is made of those countries where English is the primary language. These are countries
like England, Canada, the United States, Ireland, Australia, and New Zealand. There are more than 380
million native speakers of English in these countries alone.
There is a second group of countries that have their own varieties of English. Their histories have been
directly influenced by one of the early English-speaking societies. They use English in various
important ways within their own government and everyday life. India, Malaysia, the Philippines, and
Kenya are examples of this group. The total number of speakers in this group is in the hundreds of
millions.
In a third group of countries, English is widely used as a foreign language. However, citizens use their
native language within their own government and in everyday life. Some countries in this group are
China, Russia, Japan, Korea, Brazil, Indonesia, and many Western European countries. Some people
calculate the number of speakers in this group to be as many as one billion - and it is growing fast.
This changing situation raises many questions. Will another language replace English as the
international language? If not, will people continue to use the English of countries such as England or
the United States as models? Will new varieties of English develop in countries such as China or
Brazil? Or, in the future, will a new international variety of English develop that doesn’t belong to any
one country, but to an entire area like Asia or Europe?
(Source: Internet)
Note: native language (n) = the first language you learned to speak
Task 1. Choose the correct answer for each question.
1. England, America, Canada, Ireland, Australia, and New Zealand are countries where ___________.
A. people speak English as a foreign language
B. English is the main language
C. people still use the type of English used in England
D. English is the second language
2. In China and Brazil, English is widely used ______________.
A. in everyday life B. by the government
C. as a foreign language D. in schools by students
3. The group that uses English as ______________has the most number of English speakers.
A. the mother tongue B. the first language
C. the second language D. the foreign language
4. English originated in ______________.
A. England B. the United States C. Ireland D. New Zealand
5. In the second group, English is used in ______________.
A. English-speaking societies
B. governmental offices only
C. family life
D. public places
6. In the third group, ______________.
A. English is used to replace the native language
B. English is used in everyday life
C. the number of English speakers is increasing quickly
D. the countries belong to Asia and Europe
7. Which of the following statements is true?
A. The Philippines has its own variety of English.
B. English is widely used as a foreign language in Egypt.
C. The writer thinks English is easy to learn.
D. There will be a variety of English for each region.
8. Which sentence is the writer most likely to agree with?
A. English will stay in its current form for a long time.
B. No one knows if English will remain the international language.
C. Soon there will be more native speakers of English than non-native speakers.
D. Soon there will be more varieties of English in many regions.
Task 2. Skim each paragraph of the passage, then match each paragraph to its main idea. Write the
answer in each blank.
Paragraph 1 ______ A. There are many varieties of English.
Paragraph 2 ______ B. The future of English is certain.
Paragraph 3 ______ C. English is widely used and growing in countries like China and
Russia.
Paragraph 4 ______ D. The first group consists of countries with native English speakers.
Paragraph 5 ______ E. Countries like India and Malaysia use their own variety of English in
everyday life.
Task 3. Skim the passage again quickly. Then Choose the correct answer.
The main idea of this passage is that.
A. the most important type of English continues to be British English
B. there are many types of English, and they will continue to change
C. English will not be the international language for much longer
D. the number of English speakers ensures that English is still the international language
Task 4. Match each word with its definition. Write the answer in each blank.
1. exist _____ A. to work with numbers
2. calculate _____ B. to grow or change over time
3. primary _____ C. how things are
4. develop _____ D. begin
5. originate _____ E. type or kind of something
6. replace _____ F. the main or most important thing
7. situation _____ G. to take or fill the place of
8. variety _____ H. to be real or to be present
Task 5. Complete the following sentences using the correct form of words from Task 4.
1. I’m terrible at Math. It takes me forever to ____________ my expenses.
2. I need a new pair of shoes to ____________ my old ones, but there’s such a big
3. ____________ that I can’t decide which to buy.
4. It can be an uncomfortable when you forget someone’s name.
5. The city ____________ slowly along the river, which became its ____________ source of water.

E. Speaking
• Talking about borrowed words
I. Complete the conversation with the phrases below. There are two extra phrases that you do not
need.
A. taken from the Dutch word “honk” means “in a safe position”
B. used the word emoticons for computer keyboard symbol that express emotion
C. from the Japanese word “sukoshi” meaning the same thing, and both the two words have
similar pronunciations
D. the word “hunky-dory” to the Japanese word “honcho-dory”
E. the Japanese word “taikun” meaning “great lord or prince”
F. images, icons and symbols that express meaning without words
G. did not realise that shoguns had more power than emperors in Japan at that time
H. a very wealthy and powerful businessperson
Jack Our group has to look for English borrowed words from Japan. Have you found any, Mi?
Mi It may surprise you that English has taken more than a dozen words from Japanese. The most
commonly used words include skosh, honcho, tycoon, hunky-dory, and most recently, emoji.
Jack We often use emojis. Emojis have become so important to electronic communication. Do you
know the story of that?
Mi In the late 1990s, a Japanese computer programmer Shigetaku Kurita changed everything
1
when he invented emoji –
____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
In Japanese, the word “e” means “picture” and “moji” meaning “letter” or “character”. How
about you? Have you collected any words yet, Jack?
Jack Another word that English borrowed from Japanese is “skosh” - it means “a small amount”,
 and it is used informally. For example, “I’m a skosh hungry” means “I’m a little bit hungry.” It
2
comes
____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
American soldiers picked up “sukosshi” while they were stationed in Japan after World War II.
Mi Another borrowed Japanese word that describes someone who holds a lot of power is
3
“tycoon”. In English, the word refers to
____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
“Tycoon” comes from 4 __________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Jack I think the most interesting story is about the “hunky-dory”, and this adjective means “fine” or
“free of trouble or problems”. The word “hunky-dory” is actually a combination of words from
5
two languages. The first part of the word “hunky”
____________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
The story is the second part of the word “dory” is not very clear. One theory links 6.
__________
____________________________________________________________________________.
The word for “street” in Japanese is “tori” - being pronounced like “dori”. It is believed to be a
street in Japan where American sailors went to have fun while they were stationed there.
• Everyday English: Saying good luck and responding
II. Practise saying good luck and responding in the following situations.
1. You friend is having a test tomorrow.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
2. Your elder brother is going to start his first job.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
3. Your friend is going to take part in a badminton tournament.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
4. You know your neighbour is having the final interview to get a job.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________
5. Your best friend’s family has just moved to a new house.
A: _________________________________________________________________________________
B: _________________________________________________________________________________

F. Writing
• Writing a paragraph about ways to improve an area of English learning
Write a paragraph about how to improve the listening skill - the most challenging thing you face
when learning English, and what you have done to improve it. Use the cues below.
- pay attention to the sounds of English as it is actually spoken sounds sometimes blend
together change spoken English not always what you expect
- focus on the conversation's main idea and general context not be able to understand
everything / continue the conversation without too much effort
- combine different sources of materials. such as TV shows, the radio. films or songs get used
to various topics, intonations and pronunciations
- write what we hear/ (his method /simple, practical and very effective
- start with a short recording / write the missing words for the gaps then choose a 30- second
section of a video clip / write what we hear
When learning English, i find listening the most challenging, and I have done several things to improve
it. Firstly, ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
I hope that the tips seem to be useful to you too.
 TEST 1 (UNIT 9)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. fluent B. relation C. establish D. expanding
2. A. translate B. language C. standard D. variety
3. A. immigrant B. pick C. circle D. official
4. A. education B. concentric C. activity D. function
5. A. fluent B. translate C. language D. presentation
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. One of the biggest obstacles for new ________________ to overcome is the language barrier.
A. leavers B. newcomers C. immigrants D. citizens
7. It is the American high quality of education that draws ________________ students to the USA.
A. substitution B. replacement C. shift D. exchange
8. Learning a ________________ language alongside your mother longue is beneficial.
A. second B. secondary C. two-edged D. twofold
9. It’s important to preserve one’s ________________.
A. first tongue B. mother tongue
C. motherly language D. extinct language
10. A large ________________ can improve our power of expression and understanding.
A. dictation B. vocabulary C. wording D. wordiness
11. We were asked to ________________ a list of sentences from Vietnamese into English.
A. translate B. transfer C. paraphrase D. transform
12. When you live in a foreign country, you soon ________________ the language.
A. take up B. pick out C. pick up D. pick up on
13. You do not have to ________________ down every word in a lecture.
A. draw B. follow C. copy D. reproduce
14. I had to ________________ that word to check how to pronounce it.
A. look up B. take up C. look after D. see about
15. It is a good idea to ________________ the grammatical point and vocabulary before you have an
exam.
A. look after B. go over C. go into D. come over
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word / phrase given below. There are some
extra words that you do not need.
collocations get by look up pick up
come across know say use
16 17
When you _____________ a new English word or phrase, make a note of it!
_____________ the meaning in the dictionary, making sure you are aware of any grammatical
information. For instance, if you are looking for the meaning of a verb, check to see if the verb can be
used in a passive form, if it is followed by any particular preposition, and so on. Check also for the
18
pronunciation and __________ of a word. Is it particularly formal or informal, or used in certain
19 20
word ________________? For example, we ________________ "do housework", but "make an
effort".
IV. Combine each pair of sentences using defining relative clauses.
21. The paintings have already been sold. They are marked with a small red dot.
___________________________________________________________________________________
22. The secretary can give you the information. She sits at the first desk.
___________________________________________________________________________________
23. I wrote a letter to the woman. I met her at the meeting.
___________________________________________________________________________________
24. The speech was very informative. We listened to it last night.
___________________________________________________________________________________
25. The student is in one of my classes. You have just met his parents.
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
One of the languages that is spoken the most around the world is English. One in five persons can
communicate in English. With more than 430 million people speaking it as a second language and
26
more than 350 million speaking it as their native language, English is regarded as a(n) __________
language because of this.
27
Anywhere in the globe you go, English can be your most reliable __________ of communication.
28
Knowing English will allow you to __________ independently and creatively. Because of this,
learning English is essential for travellers.
If you want to work in international business or commerce, English is the language that you need to
know the most. When two people from different nations want to speak, they typically use English.
You can’t deny that English has 29 __________ so much importance in the modern era that if you don’t
know it, you have no 30 __________ of communicating on a global 31 __________.
The importance of English in the global job 32
__________ where a vast number of new roles are
being created quickly for multilingual workers has been widely observed. Additionally, your abilities
will always be evaluated by corporate leaders in order to perform a job more effectively, with English
always ranking highly on the list of 33 __________. Students try to 34 __________ English so they can
pursue higher education abroad. Learning
English is crucial for 35 __________ whether studying abroad or travelling.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. typical B. extensive C. accepted D. worldwide
27. A. means B. agency C. method D. power
28. A. investigate B. analyse C. explore D. consider
29. A. earned B. gained C. added D. won
30. A. wish B. support C. strength D. hope
31. A. measurement B. balance C. scale D. system
32. A. market B. store C. mart D. exchange
33. A. examples B. criteria C. foundations D. opinions
34. A. look up B. break up C. make up D. pick up
35. A. continuation B. maintenance C. survival D. extension
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
What are “Kachru’s Three Circles of English”?
Braj Kachru was a Professor of Linguistics who invented the term "‘World Englishes”. “World
Englishes” refers to the fact that the English language has been used as a global means of
communication in many nations worldwide. It also refers to the movement towards an “international
standard” of the English language.
Kachru constructed a model of the different uses of English around the world. This model is
comprised of three concentric circles, which he labelled: the Inner Circle, the Outer Circle and the
Expanding Circle.
The Inner Circle is comprised of those countries considered the “traditional bases” of English, such as
the UK, the USA, Australia, New Zealand, and part of Canada. English in these countries is classified as
the first language. Kachru labelled the Inner Circle countries as “standard-providing” - the standards
of English are produced there.
The Outer Circle is comprised of countries where English is not spoken natively but it is still
maintained as an important language for communication, as an official or second language for
business and commerce. These countries include India, Nigeria, the Philippines, Pakistan, and
Bangladesh. Kachru labelled these countries as “standard-developing” - the standards produced by
the Inner Circle are further developed and reproduced in the Outer Circle.
The Expanding Circle includes much of the rest of the world’s population - countries that do not hold
historical importance towards English, but classify it as a foreign language. Main examples of such
countries include most of Europe, China, Russia, Japan, Korea, Egypt and most of the countries in
Southeast Asia. These countries are ‘‘standard-dependent” - they fully depend on the standards
originally produced by the native speaker of the Inner Circle. They generally do not develop or
reproduce “World Englishes”.
(Source: Internet)
36. All of the following are true about “World Englishes” EXCEPT that __________.
A. English has become a global language in communication
B. English is spoken in the world in the same standard
C. people use English in the same way in different countries
D. the term was invented by an expert of English
37. People in the Inner Circle __________.
A. create the standards of the English language
B. provide standards to the study of languages
C. come from North America
D. choose English as the first choice when studying foreign languages
38. People in the Outside Circle __________.
A. develop the standards of English in a new direction
B. try to speak English as their native language
C. make English become more widely used in the world
D. use English in many aspects except business and commerce
39. People in the Expanding Circle __________.
A. produce English according to their native language
B. use the standards of English founded by native speakers
C. depend on English to develop business and commerce
D. do not have any relationship with England
40. The word “abelled” in paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to __________.
A. gave a sign to B. had an opinion on
C. stick something to D. gave a name to
VII. Complete the conversation between a group of three students with the phrases below. There
are two extra phrases that you do not need.
a. a powder that was added as makeup around the eyes
b. became part of Latin and other Romance languages before finally entering English
c. entered Latin that influenced English
d. a kind of alcohol that can be drunk
e. a language which had been influenced by the Arabic language
f. first used by a Baghdad mathematician
g. sold coffee beans throughout the Middle East
A Our group’s assignment is to find out some English word borrowed from the Arab world. I’ve
collected some information about the history of that. Arabic words entered the English language
through a number of ways. In the early 8 th century, Arab fighters invaded and took control of the
Iberian Peninsula, now Spain and Portugal. During their occupation, their language spread through
41
the region, and
_____________________________________________________________________________, and
some of the Arabic words were passed on.
B I think the most common examples are the words “algebra”, “alcohol”, “coffee” and so on. The
word “algebra” itself comes from the Arabic word “al jer”, which means a “reunion of broken parts”.
This term was 42 _____________________________________________________________________,
Muhammad Al-Khwarizmi in the name of his book “Kitab al-ebr wal-Muqabala”, which means “Rules
of Reintegration and Reduction”.
C I think we study Algebra in Mathematics and we’re all interested in the history of the word.
Let’s move on to another word - it’s “alcohol”. It comes from the Arabic word “al kohl”. “Al” is the
 43
definite article in Arabic, like the word “the” in English. The original meaning of “kohn” was
______________
_______________________________________________. It is not clear how this word came to mean
a drink, but a common belief is that this happened after the word “alcohol” entered English. The term
44
referred to substances that were used to create ethanol,
___________________________________.
A It's my turn to tell the story of the word “coffee”. There are several stories about how coffee,
another drink, was discovered. The most famous is that coffee beans were discovered in Ethiopia.
45
Long ago, traders
_______________________________________________________________________ and later to
Turkey, where it was called “kahveh”. Coffee eventually came to Europe, arriving in Italy, where it was
called “caffe”. By 1650, the drink arrived in England. By then, the name had changed to the sound it
has today, coffee.
VIII. Write sentences about how to improve the speaking skill - the most challenging thing you face
when learning English, and what you have done to improve it. Use the cues below.
46. learn a lot of grammar and vocabulary, put them into practice in spoken communication
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. look for opportunities to chat with people we meet - the most important way to improve our
English-speaking skills: use them frequently
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. find people to talk to: participating in an English-speaking club, using a language exchange app to
find a conversation partner
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. record our own voice and listen to it: correct our mistakes, improve our pronunciation and
speaking speed
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. listening to English: also a good way to improve our pronunciation, intonation, grammar and
vocabulary - a good listener: an important part of a good conversation
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 2 (UNIT 9)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. second B. fluent C. express D. concentric
2. A. copy B. official C. consist D. concentric
3. A. revision B. ability C. official D. variety
4. A. expanding B. exchanged C. fixed D. exact
5. A. common B. immigrant C. bilingual D. means
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. She works as a ______________ secretary in English and Japanese for an insurance company.
A. bicentenary B. biannual C. bilingual D. bi-fold
7. She was born in Viet Nam but her English is ______________ and idiomatic.
A. talkative B. vocal C. regular D. fluent
8. English has become a ______________ means of communication thanks to its establishment as a
mother tongue, a second language and a foreign language in all continents of the world.
A. global B. world C. universe D. sphere
9. Circles and spheres are ______________ as they share the same centre point.
A. central B. concentric C. concentrated D. spherical
10. She met life’s challenges with courage and ______________ strength.
A. central B. inner C. inward D. focal
11. In India, English is the ______________ language and the government must do its business in
English.
A. proper B. suitable C. conventional D. official
12. A line of trees marks the ______________ edge of the property.
A. outer B. outward C. outermost D. outboard
13. He studied Korean for ten years and became ______________ in the language.
A. intelligent B. proficient C. efficient D. worthy
14. Viet Nam has a(n) ______________ economy with more businesses starting and growing.
A. extending B. transferring C. expanding D. stretching
15. The main purpose of that course is to increase the ______________ ability of learners in order to
enable them to deal with different situations.
A. informing B. enlightening C. instructive D. communicative
III. Complete each blank in the text with an appropriate word. The initial letters have been given to
you.
Read something that 16i______________ you. It could be a newspaper, a novel, a magazine, or
even an English graded reader (a simplified book). Working page by page, 17u______________ the
18
words or phrases that you don’t know. L______________ up only those that are important for
19
understanding, or which are repeated. U______________ a good dictionary, and
20
m______________ a note in your English vocabulary notebook.
IV. Combine each pair of sentences using defining relative clauses.
21. The pianist is internationally famous. He played at the conceit last night.
___________________________________________________________________________________
22. Some of the people are rude. A waiter has to serve them at a restaurant.
___________________________________________________________________________________
23. The restaurant was too expensive. Jack recommended it.
___________________________________________________________________________________
24. That man is a physicist. His book on time and space has been translated into dozens of languages.
___________________________________________________________________________________
25. The woman is a weather forecaster on our city TV station. She lives next door to us.
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
English is the 26 _________ important in the world today. A very large 27
_________ of people
understand and use English in many 28 _________ of the world.
Indeed, English is a very useful language. If we 29 _________ English we can go to any place or
country we like. We shall not find it hard to 30 _________ people understand what we want to say.
31
English also helps us to learn all kinds of subjects. Hundreds of books are _________ in
32
English every day in many countries to teach people many useful things. _________ English
language has, therefore, helped to spread ideas and knowledge to all the comers of the world. There
is no subject that cannot be 33 _________ in English.
As English is used so much everywhere in the world, it has helped to make the countries in the
34
world more _________. The leaders of the world use English to understand one another. The
English language has also helped to spread better understanding and friendship among countries of
the world.
35
Lastly, a person who knows English is respected by people. It is for all these _________ that I want
to learn English.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. most B. mostly C. chiefly D. best
27. A. few B. deal C. amount D. number
28. A. countries B. places C. sites D. scenes
29. A. realize B. say C. speak D. tell
30. A. get B. let C. persuade D. make
31. A. published B. wrote C. print D. make
32. A.  B. An C. That D. The
33. A. recognized B. realized C. known D. taught
34. A. friend B. friendly C. friendship D. friendliness
35. A. reasons B. causes C. effects D. results
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
To understand how many countries have English as the first language, second language or
foreign language, we use the Three Circle Model of World Englishes developed by the linguist Braj
Kachru in 1985. According to this model, there are three circles of English speakers.
The Inner Circle is made of countries that have a majority part of the population speaking
English as native speakers. These countries are usually considered to be a part of what is known as the
Anglosphere, which are countries with a majority of native English speakers. The core Anglosphere
includes the UK, the USA, Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. The United States has the largest
English-speaking population in the world, with that number standing at 268 million.
The Outer Circle is made up of nations that have a large part of the population speaking
English as a second language. Over more than 1 billion people speak English as a second language.
Most of the countries in the Outer Circle are former colonies of the British Empire. The largest country
in this Circle is India with about 125 million English speakers, making it the second-largest English-
speaking population in the world. India is followed by Pakistan (95 million), the Philippines (90
million), and Nigeria (79 million).
 The Expanding Circle is for people speaking English as a foreign language with more than 400
million speakers. While there is no doubt about the global nature of the English language, there are a
few countries where English hasn’t been able to get a foothold. The most striking case of that of
mainland China. If you are informed that around 10 million people in that country speak English, you
would be forgiven if you think that it is an impressive number. China has a population of 1.4 billion -
making its English-speaking population less than 1% of the total population.
(Source: Internet)
36. The Three Circle Model of World Englishes can be used to _________.
A. recognise the former colonies of the British Empire
B. know the names of countries in English
C. identify how popular English is used in different countries as a first, second or foreign language
D. understand the method which the linguist Braj Kachru used in 1985 to develop the popularity of
English in the world
37. We can infer from the passage that the core Anglosphere includes _________.
A. countries where people speak English fluently
B. countries with the highest percentage of the population speaking English as a native language
C. countries with a majority of native English speakers in the world
D. the UK and former colonies of the British Empire using English as an official language
38. India is the second-largest English-speaking population in the world after _________.
A. the Inner Circle B. the UK C. the USA D. China
39. China is an example of a few countries where _________.
A. there is a large number of speakers using English every day
B. we can take the country as a striking example of the popularity of English
C. there is the smallest English-speaking population in the world
D. there is such a small percentage of the English speaking population
40. The word “nature” in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to _________.
A. feature B. material C. fauna and flora D. environment
VII. Complete the conversation with the phrases below. There are two extra phrases that you do
not need.
a. use a hammock for a nap
b. first developed and used them on boats to sleep more comfortably
 c. observed how native people valued cacao beans and took the beans back to Spain
d. originally the name for an ancient, fermented drink made from cacao seeds
e. another example of a word that passed through Spanish first before reaching English
f. a small, dog-like animal with large ears
g. the raised wooden structures that native people used to cook meat
A I’ve read a passage about some words that English has taken from language of Native
Americans.
B What are the most common words?
A Maybe they are chocolate, coyote, hammock and barbecue.
B I like chocolate a lot. Do you know the origin of that word?
A It came from “xocolatl”, which was 41_______________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
The Native Americans grew and consumed cacao for centuries before Europeans came into
contact with it.
B How about the word “coyote”?
A You know that a coyote is 42 ______________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
The original word was “coyotl”, and the word first passed the Spanish language before
becoming part of English.
43
B I sometimes
_________________________________________________________________. What is its
original word?
A It came from the word “kamaka” of the native people of the island of Hispanola in the
44
Caribbean Sea. It once meant “stretch of cloth”. Hammock is
___________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
B And the last word in the list. Barbecue refers to a method of cooking over an open fire using
wood or charcoal and a grill.
A It came from the word “barabicu” which meant “structure of sticks set upon posts”. It referred
to 45 ________________________________________________________________________.
VIII. Write sentences about how to improve your pronunciation - the most challenging thing you
face when learning English, and what you have done to improve it. Use the cues below, and
remember to insert the words showing sequence (Firstly, Secondly, Then...).
Pronunciation is really important for communication and making sure people understand your
message. I have done several things to improve my pronunciation.
46. take a short clip from a song, film or audio file, write down the words that we hear and replay it
until we have got them all; practise reading the words ourselves and try to pronounce the sounds
smoothly
Firstly, we __________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. say the words and let a dictation app write down what you say; it writes down what we said
correctly / pronounce it well; it doesn't / check those misunderstood words because we might not
have pronounced them clearly
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. prepare a few sentences, record ourselves saying them with our smartphone; listen to the
recording, check whether / satisfied with our pronunciation or not
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. use special symbols to show pronunciation, worth learning them (identify individual sounds more
precisely)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. focus on sounds: cause confusion for listeners if they are pronounced incorrectly; practise English,
make a note of any confusing sounds, practise pronouncing them clearly
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 REVIEW 3 (UNITS 7-8-9)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. coral B. annual C. paradise D. package
2. A. domestic B. majestic C. estimate D. ecosystem
3. A. variety B. itinerary C. circle D. bilingual
4. A. thrilling B. smooth C. theme D. thanks
5. A. establish B. consist C. access D. permission
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Trang An Landscape Complex is renowned for its diverse ecosystem, unique natural beauty and
____________ characteristics.
A. geology B. geological C. environmental D. ecological
7. The towers of the My Son sanctuary are the most significant ____________ of the My Son
civilization.
A. structures B. arrangements C. apartments D. plans
8. If you pay a visit to Hue, you should once visit Lang Co beach where you can have the most relaxing
time and admire the natural beauty of ____________.
A. views B. panoramas C. sights D. landscapes
9. Travelling to Ba Mun Island in Quang Ninh, tourists can explore on their own, following some
natural ____________ on the island.
A. trails B. marks C. roads D. stretches
10. For people in Cam Thanh Commune near Hoi An, the coconut wetlands provide fisheries, a
beautiful area for ____________ as well as an ideal refuge for boats during heavy storms.
A. tourist B. tour C. tourism D. tour guide
11. In Binh Ba Island (Lobster Island), there are many beautiful beaches with white sand, clear water,
blue sky, which is ____________ for those who love nature and calmness.
A. available B. famous C. good D. suitable
12. It’s an important part of your cultural identity to keep your ____________ in speaking English.
A. vocabulary B. language C. accent D. skill
13. Much ____________ comes through body language and gesture.
A. talk B. exchange C. speech D. communication
14. Try to the meaning of words rather than going straight for your dictionary.
A. judge B. guess C. decide D. expect
15. Reading is the best way to ____________ your vocabulary in any language.
A. improve B. increase C. raise D. put up
III. Form compound nouns from a word in the upper row and another in the lower, and then fill
them in the blanks. Make sure that you use them in the correct form.
upper row: travel coast package holiday tour
lower row: resort guide brochure line holiday
I will never forget last year’s summer holidays, and not because we had a good experience. We
16
chose a ____________ in order to cut some expenses, but in the end we were disappointed. Our
17 18
accommodation was a ____________ that had been advertised as a "five-star palace" in the
____________. At the check-in, waiting for the key to our room, we realised it was an overbooked
hotel, with too many people and old, worn-out facilities. Besides that, it was a long distance from the
19
city centre. On the second day, we were supposed to go trekking along a nearby unspoilt
____________. But the 20 ____________ left early without us, so we tried to hitchhike there.
IV. Choose the underlined part among A, B, C or D that needs correcting.
21. In a basketball game a player what is fouled receives one or two free throws.
A. what B. is fouled C. receives D. free throws
22. All her children have graduated from university, that is the reason for her to be proud.
A. All her B. from C. that D. for her
23. This is the store in where you can buy anything you need for your project.
A. in where B. can C. anything D. need for
24. The water temperature in a spring depends on that of the soil through where the water flows.
A. a spring B. on that C. where D. flows
25. This is the car which its engine uses only 4 liters of petrol per 100 kilometers.
A. which its B. uses only C. of petrol D. per
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Different Types of Tourism
26
Perhaps the most common type of tourism is what most people ____________ with
traveling: recreation tourism. This is 27 ____________ people go to a place that is very different from
their regular day-to-day life to relax and have fun. Beaches, theme parks and campgrounds are often
the most common places regularly visited by 28 ____________ tourists.
29
If the ____________ of one’s visit to a particular place is to get to know its history and
culture, then this type of tourism is known as cultural tourism. They may attend festivals and
ceremonies in order to 30 ____________ a better understanding of the people, their beliefs and their
practices.
For tourists who want to see wildlife or take the joy of just being in the middle of nature,
nature tourism is the answer. Ecotourism and nature treks are all part of this kind of tourism. Bird
31
watching, for example, is one activity that nature tourists are fond of doing. What ____________
this kind of tourism is that it has low impact 32 ____________ the local community.
Religious tourism is another type of tourism where people go to a religious location or
locations to follow the 33 ____________ of their founder or to attend a religious 34 ____________.
35
Medical or health tourism is a relatively new type of tourist ____________ where the main focus of
the travel is improving one’s health, physical appearance or fitness.
(Source: Internet)
26. A. join B. acquaint C. share D. associate
27. A. what B. when C. where D. why
28. A. recreation B. recreational C. enjoyment D. enjoying
29. A. plan B. achievement C. objective D. object
30. A. gain B. increase C. benefit D. provide
31. A. suggests B. offers C. marks D. expresses
32. A. for B. at C. in D. on
33. A. footstep B. footsteps C. foot D. footprint
34. A. memorial B. celebration C. anniversary D. ceremony
35. A. act B. action C. activity D. acting
VI. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question.
Turning Food into Art
For many of us, food isn’t that important. However, for a few people, food is very important.
For these people, meals are a kind of art.
These people are interested in something called “haute cuisine”. Haute cuisine is French for
“high cooking”. You can usually find haute cuisine in fancy French hotels and high-level restaurants.
Haute cuisine has changed over the years, but the most important parts have remained the
same. Haute cuisine meals are almost always very complicated, and they take a very long time to
make. Usually, an haute cuisine meal has very many small dishes, instead of a few large ones. Also,
with haute cuisine dishes, the appearance is very important. Of course, an haute cuisine dish must
taste wonderful, but that is not enough. An haute cuisine dish must also look beautiful. Another very
important part of haute cuisine is wine. Chefs and customers always try to select a wine that is a
perfect match for their meal. The wine that people drink with haute cuisine is often very rare. You will
not be surprised to hear that haute cuisine dishes are almost always very expensive.
Haute cuisine is traditionally French, but other countries have similar concepts of food. People
often compare Japanese kaiseki to haute cuisine. Kaiseki is another very complicated, very high-level
kind of food. In Japan, kaiseki is also considered a kind of art. When Japanese chefs prepare kaiseki,
they don’t just consider the taste of the food. They also consider the food’s texture, colour, and
appearance. Chefs even match the colour of the food to the colour of the plate and the chopsticks. Of
course, although haute cuisine and kaiseki share many similarities, the food itself is quite different.
If you ever get the chance to try kaiseki or haute cuisine, remember one thing: You are not just having
a meal; you are enjoying a very special kind of art.
(Adapted from Prepare)
36. What can we say about the wines that people drink with haute cuisine?
A. They all come from France. B. They are all quite common.
C. They are always red wine. D. They are usually rare.
37. What is true about the dishes in haute cuisine?
A. Haute cuisine usually has many small dishes.
B. Haute cuisine usually has just a few large dishes.
C. Haute cuisine usually has many large dishes.
D. Haute cuisine usually has just a few small dishes.
38. What does the fifth sentence of the third paragraph mean?
A. Haute cuisine has to taste good, but it has to be good in other ways, too.
B. Haute cuisine only has to taste good.
C. Haute cuisine has to look good, but it doesn’t have to taste good.
D. Every haute cuisine dish tastes the same.
39. What does the passage NOT say about haute cuisine?
A. It is very expensive.
B. It takes a short time to make.
C. It is very complicated.
D. It is usually served in fancy hotels and high-level restaurants.
40. What does the passage say about kaiseki and haute cuisine?
A. The food is the same in both. B. People never care about them.
C. People often compare them. D. Haute cuisine is older than kaiseki.
VII. Complete the conversation about a tour to Cue Phuong National Park and Van Long Nature
Reserve, using the responses (A-G) given. There are two extra sentences that you do not need.
A. It’s harder than the first day, but it’s worth being in the fresh nature with sounds of birds.
B. We drive back to the gate to visit the Primates Rescue center.
C. Arriving at Tam Coc, we have lunch in the local restaurant with the view over the boat pier.
D. Ninh Binh is an outstanding destination with stunning landscapes.
E. Then have dinner and spend a night at a simple bungalow in the park.
F. We can see the swamps, limestone peaks, caves and there may be chances to see different
kinds of birds.
G. Then we continue our riding, passing rice paddies, villages through the limestone peaks to
Tam Coc.
Mi: Hi, Amelia. Are you free this weekend? If so, let’s join my family on a two-day tour to Ninh
Binh province?
Amelia: Wow. Fantastic. I can’t wait. What interesting places are we going to visit?
Mi: Look at these itinerary details, Amelia. When we get to Ninh Binh by car, we start cycling on
the country road to Hoa Lu, an ancient citadel.
Amelia: Was it built in the 10th century during the Dinh and Le Dynasties?
41
Mi: Yes, you’re good at Vietnamese history.
___________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Amelia: To Tam Coc? What does it mean?
Mi: In Chinese Vietnamese, “Coc” means a cave, and Tam Coc literally means “Three Caves”.
42
___________________________________________________________________________
 _____________________________________________________________________________
Amelia: And we can take some snapshots there, I think.
43
Mi: Right. After lunch, we spend two hours cycling to Cue Phuong National Park.
______________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Amelia: Sounds interesting. We live with nature all day. How about the second day?
44
Mi: After breakfast and morning exercises, we cycle up the hills into the jungles.
______________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Amelia: I think so. And we learn more about plants and animals there.
Mi: After that, we’ll take the local bamboo boats to visit Van Long Nature Reserve not far away
from that.
Amelia: What will we do there?
45
Mi: ___________________________________________________________________________.
We’ll get back to the pier and get on the car back to Ha Noi.
Amelia: I hope we’ll get home before 6 p.m.
VIII. Use the words or phrases given to write meaningful sentences about the ways to improve your
spoken English in a conversation.
46. most important / goal / speaking English / communicate
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. although / speaking English fast / make / you / sound / native speaker / it / make / other people /
difficult / understand you
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. thinking / English / thing / you / practice/ all / time / because / it / really important / when / speak
/ English
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. if you / forget / word / stop / sentence / middle / or / use / other words / describe it
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. self-confidence / help / speak better / every English conversation
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 10. PLANET EARTH
A. Pronunciation
● Rhythm in sentences
I. Pay attention to the stressed bold syllables in the following sentences. Then read them aloud.
1. Fauna plays essential roles in ecosystems.
2. Each habitat supports a unique set of animal species.
3. Different types of fauna are adapted to various habitats.
4. Fauna refers to the collection of animal life or species in a particular region.
5. It consists of the animals that inhabit a specific ecosystem or geographical area.
II. Underline the stressed syllables in the following sentences, and read them aloud.
1. Flora and fauna are vital to a healthy habitat.
2. The extinction of fauna is more visible to US.
3. Insects feed on flora and birds need insects to survive.
4. It is important to understand as we are watching the rapid extinction of both.
5. Coral reefs and the seabed are threatened by destructive fishing methods and other activities.

B. Vocabulary
• Planet Earth & Habitats & Flora and fauna
I. Complete the sentences with the words / phrases given below.
habitat solar system food chains preserve nature reserve
grasslands flora and fauna body of water landforms ecological balance
1. The two islands are separated by a large ____________________.
2. ____________________ come in many varieties across the planet, ranging from small hills to large
mountains.
3. Our ____________________ is made of a star - the Sun - and eight planets.
4. The panda’s natural ____________________ is the bamboo forest.
5. Ancient forests declined and ____________________ became widespread.
6. A number of species of both ____________________ have gone extinct over the past centuries.
7. Just as many hands make light work, many individuals working together can help by protecting and
maintaining ____________________.
8. Different habitats and ecosystems provide many possible ____________________ that make up a
food web.
9. Pu Luong is a(n) ____________________ in Thanh Hoa which is not only the habitat of plentiful of
flora, but the living environment of many species of fauna as well.
10. The money should be used to ____________________ forests.
II. Complete the gaps in the text with the words given below.
set functions ecosystems collection balance
efforts destruction activities loss conditions
Flora can vary significantly from one place to another. Tropical rainforests, for example, have
incredibly diverse flora with thousands of plant species, while deserts may have relatively few plant
species adapted to arid 1 _______________. Flora can be classified into native and non-native species.
Native flora is naturally occurring plants in an area, while non-native flora has been brought to an
area by human 2 _______________, intentionally or unintentionally. Conservation 3 _______________
4
often focus on protecting native flora, especially in the face of habitat _______________ and
invasive non-native species that can threaten native 5 _______________.
Fauna refers to the 6 _______________ of animal life or species in a particular region. It consists of
the animals that inhabit a specific ecosystem or geographical area. Different types of fauna are
adapted to various habitats, such as deserts, forests, oceans, grasslands or freshwater ecosystems.
Each habitat supports a unique 7 _______________ of animal species. Fauna plays essential roles in
8
ecosystems. They may be predators, prey, pollinators or serve other ecological _______________
that help maintain the 9 _______________ of nature. Human activities can have a significant impact
on fauna, both positive and negative. People rely on animals for food, clothing and companionship,
but they can also be responsible for habitat 10 _______________ and overexploitation.
• Vocabulary for Reading
III. Complete the sentences with the words / phrases given below.
raise appreciate habitat loss awareness rely on
essential release fascinating add ecology
1. Sustainable development is _______________ for the present time as well as the future.
2. Greenpeace works to promote _______________ of the dangers that threaten our planet today.
3. _______________ - due to destruction, fragmentation, or degradation of habitat – is the primary
threat to the survival of wildlife.
4. The main aim of _______________ is to understand the distribution of biotic and abiotic factors of
living things in the environment.
5. Learning your flora and fauna can be a(n) _______________ way to satisfy your curiosity and
connect with the natural world.
6. We, humans, are part of the biological diversity and _______________ it in many ways.
7. Trees and plants _______________ oxygen during the day through the process of photosynthesis.
8. The club’s activities will _______________ people’s awareness of environmental issues.
9. I really _______________ all the help you have given me.
10. The company offers high quality garden furniture that is sure to _______________ beauty to any
home.
● Prepositions
IV. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. I am looking forward _____ my holiday.
2. Mars is the fourth planet _____ the Sun and the second smallest planet _____ the solar system
after Mercury.
3. How does the Earth look _____ the outer space? - The Earth looks like a bright ball _____ space.
4. Forests provide habitat _____ animals.
5. Do you want to add your name _____ the list?
6. These nutrients are absolutely vital _____ good health.
7. Shortages _____ the food chain can affect the population.
8. Every day billions of people rely _____ flora and fauna to obtain food, medicine and energy.
9. He loves seeing butterflies in the garden feeding _____ the flowers of plants that his family takes
care of every day.
10. We can use the organic liquid seaweed as fertilisers _____ plants.

C. Grammar
● Non-defining relative clauses
I. Write D (defining) or ND (non-defining) next to the relative clauses.
1. My favourite book, which is about Vietnamese landscape, has now been made into a film. ____
2. The boy, who had read the book, liked the film. ____
3. The man who she’s interviewing wrote the book. ____
4. I couldn’t find any brochure on Morocco, where I’m going on holiday next month. ____
5. My aunt, who is a doctor, lives in Ha Noi.
6. The girl whose father was rescued in the story was Chinese.
7. The fairy story, which was written in the 19lh century, is still read today.
8. I couldn’t watch the documentary film which was on TV last night.
II. Complete the sentences with the correct words.
1. The park, _________ we often played football, has been redeveloped.
2. This computer, _________ has the latest software, cost me a fortune.
3. The man _________ spoke to her at the conference was the director.
4. Her new dress, _________ her mother hated, cost £ 100.
5. The woman, _________ dog won a competition, was interviewed on TV.
6. His car, _________ was new, broke down.
7. The actor, _________ films won both the Oscar and BAFTA, is really talented.
8. The song, _________ he wrote in ten minutes, made millions.
9. The girl, _________ was ten, was his cousin.
10. The new shopping centre, _________ took two years to build, is excellent.
III. Read the text, and choose the correct relative pronouns.
Johnny Depp, 1 who / which / who / where was born in Kentucky in 1963, is a well-known American
actor. He first became famous when he starred in the TV series 21 Jump Street, in 2 who / which /
whose / where he played a young police officer. This role, 3 who / which / whose / where he played
for nearly four years, turned him into a teen idol. Later, Depp played the title role in the film Edward
Scissorhands, 4 who / which / whose / where was directed by Tim Burton, 5 who / which / whose /
where partner is the actress Helena Bonham Carter. Depp has two children with his partner Vanessa
Paradis, and they divide their time between their five homes, including a villa in the south of France
called Le Plan de la Tour, 6 who / which / whose / where Depp makes his own wine.
IV. Complete the sentences using who, which, whose or where.
1. Her job, _________ is busy and stressful, is not very well-paid.
2. My parents’ house, _________ I grew up, is close to Tan Son Nhat Airport.
3. They were married for 50 years, _________ is a very long time.
4. Last summer he went to Da Lat, _________ he worked as a fruit picker.
5. Mai in my class, brother is really good-looking, _________ is very popular at school.
6. That woman, was the company director, _________ apologised for the mistake.
7. Michael Jackson, _________ is world-famous, died in 2009.
8. The nursery in our neighbourhood, _________ my younger sister is looked after, is fantastic for
young children.
9. My cousin’s teacher, _________ name is Mr. Nam, thinks there should be more equipment for the
school.
10. The farm _________ they grow strawberries is just outside our city.
V. Rewrite the following sentences. Use the sentences in brackets to form non-defining relative
sentences.
1. The restaurant on that street serves excellent food. (My father used to work there.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Mr. and Mrs. Lam live next door to us. (Their daughter is a pop star.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. The new block of fiats will be finished next week. (It has 25 floors.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. J.K. Rowling is a billionaire. (She wrote the Harry Potter books.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. My dad’s new car is very fast. (It costs a lot of money.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Our English teacher speaks Vietnamese as well. (Her name is Miss Oakes.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. Phu Quoc is a beautiful island. (We have a small house there.)
___________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Complete the sentences with the relative clauses below.
where we usually go on holiday who comes from Colombia
who was born in Russia in 1987 which was invented in the US in 1951
whose films include Titanic which is on the fourth floor
1. Our flat, _______________________________, is in the middle of town.
2. Maria Sharapova, was the world’s best female tennis player in 2005-2007.
3. Shakira, _______________________________, released her first album in 1995.
4. The bar code, _______________________________, is widely used in supermarkets and shops
nowadays.
5. Leonardo DiCaprio, _______________________________, believes in protecting the environment.
6. Phu Quoc, _______________________________, is in the Gulf of Thailand.
VII. Invent relative clauses to complete the sentences. Use the questions to help you.
1. Steven Spielberg, _______________________________, was born in the USA. (What film did
Spielberg direct?)
2. Italy, _______________________________, is in Central Europe. (What’s Italy famous for?)
3. Champagne, _______________________________, is a very popular drink. (Where is champagne
produced?)
4. Jennifer Aniston, _______________________________, starred in Friends. (Who’s her ex-
husband?)
5. 10 Downing Street, _______________________________, is in the centre of London. (Who lives
there?)
6. Madonna, _______________________________, was born in Michigan. (What does Madonna do?)
VIII. Put commas where necessary in the following sentences.
1. The police arrested the man who stole the motorbike.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. The competition which lasted two hours was really exciting.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. I met the man who started the company.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. The driver of the red car who had just passed his driving test caused the accident.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. The hotel where a lot of film stars stay has five stars.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. That’s the car which they used in the James Bond film.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. We live near a forest where you can see deer and wild horses.
___________________________________________________________________________________
IX. Write relative clauses using the words in brackets and which, that or no relative pronoun as
appropriate. Put commas where necessary.
1. I discovered the shoes ________________________ were quite expensive. (be, the prettiest)
2. The coat I tried on ________________________ looked very smart. (be, not very expensive)
3. The beach nearest the hotel ________________________ was deserted. (be, about a mile long)
4. The finger ________________________ last month is OK now. (Jane, break)
5. The orange juice we had for breakfast ________________________ was delicious. (be, freshly
squeezed)
6. The thing ________________________ was the low price. (surprise, me, most)
7. The sign next to the lake ________________________ said bathing was prohibited. (I, not notice at
first)
8. The goal ________________________ was really cool. (win, the match)
X. Combine each pair pf sentences, using non-defining relative clauses.
1. Ann is very friendly. She lives next door.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. We stayed at the Grand Hotel. Ann recommended it to us.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. I went to see the doctor. He told me to rest for a few days.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Jack is one of my closest friends. I have known him for a very long time.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. We went to Mai’s party. We enjoyed it very much.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. My uncle Nam is away from home a lot. His job involves a lot of travelling.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. We often go to visit our grandparents in Ba Vi. It is only 20 miles away.
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. The new stadium will be opened next month. It can hold 60,000 people.
___________________________________________________________________________________
XI. Read the information and complete the sentences, using either defining or non defining relative
clauses.
1. There is a woman living next door. She is a doctor.
 The woman
2. I’ve got a brother called Phong. He lives in Ha Noi. He is a doctor.
 My brother Phong
3. I was looking for a book this morning. I have found it now.
 I have found
4. London was once the largest city in the world, but the population is now falling.
 The population of London
5. A job was advertised. A lot of people applied for it. Few of them had the necessary qualifications.
 Few of
6. Ms. Brown has a son. She showed me a photograph of him. He is an engineer.
 Ms. Brown showed me
XII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D to complete the sentences.
1. The Taj Mahal, ______________ is recognized as one of the wonders of the world, was built by an
Indian King in memory of his beloved wife.
A. which B. that C. where D. what
2. Louis Pasteur, ______________ discovered a cure for rabies, was a French scientist.
A. he B. that C. who D. whom
3. Some of the boys ______________ didn’t come.
A. whom I invited them B. I invited them
C. I invited D. when I invited
4. The restaurant ______________ Bob recommended was too expensive.
A. which it B. that C. where D. at which
5. Mexico City, ______________ is the capital of Mexico, is a cosmopolitan city.
A. which B. that C. where D. What
6. We went to different places ______________ you find people language was hard to understand.
A. where - which B. where - whose
C. that - whose D. which – whose
7. We came within sight of Everest, ______________ has attracted so many climbers.
A. the summit of which B. which the summit
C. whose summit of D. of which the summit.
8. I read about the child ______________ life was saved by her pet dog.
A. whom B. who C. her D. Whose
9. The police have to try to catch the men ______________ drive dangerously.
A. who B. whom C. they D. Which
10. There was a small room into ______________ we all crowded.
A. which B. where C. that D. it
XIII. Use a relative pronoun to combine two sentences into one with a defining or non defining
relative clause.
1. Many Americans are concerned with money. A good life is thought to be bought with money.
 Many Americans
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. They liked the TV programme, “All in the Family". It is about spending more time on the own
personal interests.
 They liked ________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Many Americans were unhappy with President Carter. He failed to improve the economy.
 Many Americans were ______________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. In the 1980s, the most successful action films were about a man called "Rambo". He always won in
any struggle.
 In the 1980s, the
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. By the 1980s, computers had become much smaller. Anyone could learn how to use them.
 By the 1980s, computers ____________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Millions of Americans had a “personal” computer in their home in the 1980s. They could use it to
read newspaper stories, buy things, do schoolwork, and play games.
 In their home in the 1980s, millions of Americans
_________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. The technological improvement can bring us a good life. We lead a good life with almost no limits.
 The technological improvement
_______________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. Let’s visit Trick Eye Museum in Hong Kong. The museum has 50 optical illusion paintings and
installations over five different themed zones.
 Let’s visit
_________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________

D. Reading
• Reading about flora and fauna
I. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
Flora refers to all the plants in a particular region. Flora benefits our planet in many ways. First, plants
use the energy of sunlight to convert carbon dioxide from the air to carbohydrates needed for their
growth. In this process of photosynthesis, plants also produce oxygen, which we need to breathe.
Secondly, flora provides food not only for humans but also for the animals living in the area. A plant
may be a direct food source, for example, a deer grazes on grass or leaves of trees. Next, flora
provides materials for shelter and warmth.
Animals like fish and birds find shelter in plants and use plant materials to build their nests and
homes. In addition, some plants are water purifiers which filter water for drinking. When plants die,
dead plant parts make fertile soil. Moreover, plant roots hold soil in place from rain washing it away.
Strong roots of some plants protect the ground from destructive waves of seawater.
(Source: Internet)
Task 1: Are the sentences true (T) or false (F)? Correct the false statements.
1. Plants use the energy of sunlight to produce oxygen for their growth.
2. Flora supply food directly to animals and humans.
3. Grass is a source of food for some animals, for example deer.
4. Some kinds of plants can make water safe for drinking.
5. Flora is vital to erosion control and land protection.
Task 2: Match the highlighted words in the text with their meanings. Write the answers in the
blanks.
1. convert _____ A. causing a lot of damage
2. shelter _____ B. good for farming
3. filter _____ C. a place that gives protection from bad weather or attack
4. fertile _____ D. change from one form to another
5. destructive _____ E. make something clean and clear
II. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Flora across the continents
Australia has a large number of unique species of flora and fauna. The wattle is a small evergreen with
fragrant green flowers. Adopted as the national flower, it is so popular that the first day of spring is
known as the National Wattle Day. While Australia is well- known for its hot deserts, it is also home to
a tropical rainforest - the Wet Tropics of Queensland - with its significance in providing a record of
ecological processes.
Asia is very diverse, and it has a mix of habitats. Southeast Asia has tropical rainforest, East Asia has
temperate forests, and South Asia has tropical rain and dry forest. The largest flower in the world, the
rafflesia, native in Indonesia can be over three feet in diameter and weigh 15 to 20 pounds. It is also
known as the corpse flower because it smells like rotten meat.
The Namib Desert in South Africa is one of the driest deserts in the world. Despite the heat, the
Welwitschia, one of the oldest plants in the world, grows here, absorbing moisture through its leaves
from the fog which comes from the Atlantic Ocean every two weeks. Its two leaves turn red during
daytime, and turn green at night for photosynthesis.
The Amazon rainforest, covering almost 40 percent of South America, is considered the most
biodiverse region on the planet, home to as many as 80,000 plant species. Hot lips with red blossoms
grow in the tropical rainforests of Central and South America. Their flowers are actually colourful
leaves. Their main task is to attract butterflies and hummingbirds to collect the pollen and pollinate
the plants. In the Andean cliffs of Peru, 4000 metres above the sea level, you might come upon a so
tall tree that you may feel like you are “Alice in Wonderland”. Ten metres tall, the Titanca tree bears
fruit when it is over one hundred years old.
(Source: Internet)
1. The wattle in Australia _____________.
A. blooms on the first day of spring B. is the national flower
C. grows in hot deserts D. has different colours depending on the weather
2. The Wet Tropics of Queensland _____________.
A. helps scientists find information about ecological processes
B. is in the hottest desert in Australia
C. has the largest flower in the world
D. is significant for the study of the biodiversity of flora and fauna in Australia
3. From the mix of habitats in Asia, we can infer that _____________.
A. Asia has all the species of flora and fauna from other continents
B. species of flora and fauna cannot flourish well there
C. the largest Hower in the world can grow there
D. Asia is home to a large number of species of flora and fauna
4. The rafflesia is also known as the corpse flower because of _____________.
A. its big size B. its native habitat
C. its impressive weight D. its bad smell
5. The Welwitschia in the Namib Desert _____________.
A. absorbs moisture coming from the Atlantic Ocean every day
B. can survive there because it is one of the oldest plants in the world
C. develops a special form of photosynthesis to survive there
D. has only two leaves in two colours - red and green
6. The Amazon rainforest is considered the most biodiverse region on the planet because _________.
A. it covers almost 40 percent of South America
B. home to unique species of plants, such as hot lips and the Titanca tree
C. it is the natural habitat to as many as 80,000 plant species
D. it covers tropical rainforests in Central and South America
7. All of the following are true about the Titanca tree EXCEPT that _____________.
A. it grows 4000 metres above the sea level
B. you can find it in the Amazon
C. it bears fruit when it is over one century old
D. it is very impressive to tourists
8. The word “pollinate” in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to _____________.
A. to attract butterflies and hummingbirds to collect the pollen
B. to produce pollen for the other surrounding plants
C. to make other flowers of the same type produce seeds
D. to make tourists feel like they are in Alice in Wonderland
III. Read the following passage and choose the correct answer for each question.
In One Cubic Foot
In any environment - forest, mountain, or water - you always see the big animals first: birds,
mammals, fish. But under your feet, on land or in the water, there are many smaller organisms:
insects, tiny plants, miniature sea creatures. They seem unimportant, but, in fact, these sea creatures
and ground dwellers are “the heart of life on the Earth,” says naturalist E.O. Wilson. Without them,
our world would change dramatically.
Most organisms on the Earth live on the ground or just below it. Here, they are part of an important
cycle. Plants and animals fall to the ground when they die. Later, tiny insects and other organisms
break down the dead plant and animal material. This process eventually returns nutrients to the soil
and gives plants energy. Plants can then help to maintain a healthy environment for humans and
other animals.
Despite their importance, scientists know very little about most ground organisms. To learn more,
photographer David Liittschwager went to different places around the world, including a forest, a
river, a mountain, and a coral reef. In each place, he put a green 12-inch cube on the ground or in the
water. Then he and his team counted and photographed the organisms that lived in or moved
through the cube. Often they discovered hundreds, some only a millimeter in size. “It was like finding
little gems,” he says. In the coral reef in French Polynesia, he saw thousands of creatures in the cube
and photographed 600. The team identified as many as possible, but it was difficult. Many of the
animals they found were new species.
(Source: Internet)
1. Another title for the passage could be _____________.
A. Dangers to Ground Creatures B. The Importance of Tiny Organisms
C. Saving Small Animals in Cubes D. The Life of Nutrients
2. The word “miniature” in paragraph 1 means _____________.
A. very small B. very large C. very beautiful D. very important
3. Where do most organisms on the Earth live?
A. in the sea B. on or just below the ground
C. deep underground D. in the air
4. Liittschwager and his team used the cube to _____________.
A. collect different species for research
B. test the quality of the soil and water
C. count and photograph animal species
D. protect animals from human activities
5. The word "their” in paragraph 3 refers to _____________.
A. scientists B. ground organisms C. cubes D. nutrients
6. Why was it difficult to identify the creatures at the coral reef?
A. Many were new to science. B. The water was cloudy.
C. They were too small. D. Many of them looked the same.
7. All of the Following are true about Liittschwager and his team EXCEPT that _____________.
A. they went to various places in the world
B. they discovered numerous organisms in small sizes
C. they examined cubes by putting them on the ground or in the water
D. they did some experiments with the organisms
8. Why does Liittschwager call the organisms "little gems” in the last paragraph?
A. They are difficult for him to see.
B. He thinks they are valuable and precious.
C. Many of the organisms are shiny.
D. The organisms look like little stones.
IV. Read the following passage and choose the correct answer for each question.
Can Animals predict Earthquakes?
Dear Scientist Sam,
I noticed my dog acting very nervous only a few minutes before a recent earthquake shook the
house. Is it possible that my dog knew the earthquake was going to happen?
Janet
Sam’s reply:
Well, Janet, people have believed for many centuries that animals can predict earthquakes. In fact, we
can look back to records from the ancient Greeks. They noticed that animals acted oddly in the hours
before earthquakes. Even now, people talk about dogs that won’t stop barking and cats that won’t
come out of hiding before an earthquake. Furthermore, strange behaviour like this before
earthquakes isn’t limited to pets. People have also reported seeing chicken stop laying eggs, bees
leaving their homes, and big groups of fish dying mysteriously in the hours before a natural disaster
hits.
It’s hard to answer your question, since not all seismologists or animal experts agree that animals can
predict earthquakes. Those that disagree claim that we should take into account other things that
affect animal behaviour, such as hunger. On the other hand, many people who believe that animals
can predict earthquakes often have records of very strange animal behaviour right before the ground
shakes. To them, this is evidence that animals can indeed predict earthquakes.
In short, the truth is that we aren't sure. Animals might be able to sense earthquakes before they
happen, but there is no solid evidence that they can. However, one thing that most seismologists can
agree on is that more research is needed. Animals may be the key to predicting earthquakes before
they happen, and could help save many lives.
(Adapted from Scope)
1. Janet wrote to Scientist Sam to find out _____________.
A. how and why earthquakes happen
B. the history of animals and earthquakes
C. if animals can predict earthquakes
D. if her dog was sick because his acting was nervous
2. According to the passage, which of these statements is correct?
A. People have always believed that animals can predict earthquakes.
B. People believe that animals can be trained to predict earthquakes.
C. People have only recently believed animals can predict earthquakes.
D. People believe that scientists should research the matter more.
3. Which of these is NOT a reason that Scientist Sam cannot really answer Janet’s question?
A. People have different opinions on the issue.
B. He personally does not believe animals can predict earthquakes.
C. There is not enough evidence to prove anything.
D. There is no evidence that animals can predict earthquakes.
4. Seismologists all agree that _____________.
A. animals cannot predict earthquakes
B. there is not enough research on this topic
C. we can understand earthquakes by researching animal
D. we cannot give the correct answer to that question
5. Which of the following statements is true?
A. Only pets would have strange behaviours before earthquakes.
B. The ancient Greeks kept dogs and cats to predict earthquakes.
C. Several animals except pets also have strange behaviours.
D. Animals can predict earthquakes just after they happen.
6. People who do not believe that animals can predict earthquakes think that _____________.
A. animals can act strangely for different reasons
B. strange behaviours happen in hours before an earthquake
C. it might be a hoax that animals had strange behaviours before earthquakes
D. all other people agree with them about that
7. The word “them” in paragraph 2 refers to _____________.
A. people who think animals can predict earthquakes
B. people who don’t think animals can predict earthquakes
C. the records of strange behaviours of animals before earthquakes
D. scientists who will research the matter in the near future
8. The tone of the reply is _____________.
A. neutral B. subjective C. humourous D. professional
V. Read the following passage and choose the correct answer for each question.
The Incredible Dolphin
Many people say dolphins are intelligent. They seem to be able to think, understand, and learn things
quickly. But are they as smart as humans, or are they more like cats and dogs? Dolphins use the brains
quite differently from the way humans do. But scientists say dolphins and humans are alike in some
ways.
Like humans, every dolphin has its own “name.” The name is a special whistle. Each dolphin chooses a
specific whistle for itself, usually by its first birthday. Dolphins are like people in other ways, too. They
“talk” to each other about a lot of things - such as their age, their feelings, and finding food. They also
use a system of sounds and body language to communicate. Understanding dolphin conversation is
not easy for humans. No one “speaks dolphin” yet, but some scientists are trying to learn.
Dolphins are also social animals. They live in groups called pods, and they often join others from
different pods to play games and have fun - just like people. Scientists believe playing together is
something only intelligent animals do.
Dolphins and humans are similar in another way: both species make plans for getting things they
want. In the seas of southern Brazil, for example, dolphins use an intelligent strategy to get food.
When there are fish near a boat, dolphins signal to the fishermen to put their nets in the water. Using
this method, the men can catch a lot of fish. Why do dolphins assist the men? There is an advantage
for them: they get to eat some of the fish that escape from the net.
(Adapted from Active)
1. Dolphins are social animals because they _____________.
A. communicate with people for fun
B. often travel with others in a group
C. are intelligent enough to play games together
D. play games and have fun like people
2. All of the following are the ways to tell if an animal is intelligent EXCEPT that _____________.
A. it can know how to do things in advance
B. it can hold entertainment activities
C. it can have ways to communicate with each other
D. it can get fish in the fishermen’s net
3. What does the reading NOT mention?
A. how dolphins communicate with each other
B. how dolphins play games and have fun
C. how dolphins work together as a team
D. how dolphins move quickly through the water
4. Where does a dolphin get its “name”?
A. It gets it from its mother. B. It gets it from scientists.
C. It chooses it for itself. D. No one knows.
5. Which sentence about dolphin language is true?
A. Dolphins “talk” to each other about many things.
B. Dolphins whistle, but they don’t use body language.
C. Dolphin conversation is easy for humans to understand.
D. Dolphins don’t “talk’ about their feelings.
6. Which sentence about dolphins and humans is NOT true?
A. Dolphins and humans use their brains in the same way.
B. Dolphins and humans play games in groups.
C. Dolphins and humans plan ways to do things.
D. Dolphins and humans communicate their feelings.
7. The word “others” in paragraph 3 refers to other _____________.
A. pods B. people C. dolphins D. games
8. Why do dolphins sometimes help fishermen?
A. Dolphins are kind animals.
B. The dolphins can get food that way.
C. The dolphins are scared of humans.
D. The fishermen ask the dolphins for help.

E. Speaking
• Talking about threats to flora and fauna and how to protect them
I. The students (Lan, Nick and Phong) are talking about the threats to plants and animals and how
we can do to protect them. Use the provided cues to complete their conversation. You can use
some extra phrases and expressions to make the conversation meaningful.
Lan: - many threats to plants and animals
- face habitat destruction, also known as habitat loss
- human activities: a major role in habitat destruction
There are many threats to plants and animals. First, they
_______________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Nick: the increasing demand for forest products: humans cut down forests in large quantities,
causing deforestation
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Phong: - pollution: a major danger to biodiversity, affecting a variety of ecosystems
- water pollution (chemicals, fertilizers, and plastics): an impact on aquatic ecosystems
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
 _____________________________________________________________________________
Lan: pesticides and heavy metals: the soil polluted and unable to support growing plants
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Nick: sea levels: rising (climate change), harm coastal habitats and the organisms (rely on them)
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Phong: - the government: maintain nature reserves and national parks
- national parks: protect wildlife in their natural habitat; also protect endangered species
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lan: hold campaigns: call on the community to participate in planting, protecting green trees
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Nick: the campaign: raise public awareness in creating a green, clean, beautiful environment
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Phong: contribute to the national project “Growing I billion trees in the coming years”
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
• Everyday English: Persuading someone to do something and
responding
II. Read the conversation and underline the expressions of persuading and responding.
A: What’s up? Are you OK?
B: No, not really. It’s my job. I’m not enjoying it and I didn’t get the promotion.
A: Why don’t you talk to your boss and ask for his advice?
B: I tried. He’s not very helpful. He said he was busy and didn’t have time to talk.
A: Well, you need to try again. You should tell him it’s important.
B: I don’t see the point. He gave the promotion to Sam, my colleague.
A: If I were you, I’d look for another job. Why don’t we look online at vacancies and get some ideas?
B: That sounds great. Thanks for listening to me.
III. Fill in each blank in the following conversations with the appropriate phrases given below.
Why don't we OK, let not That sounds great What should we do
Let's invite Let's not make a noise I suggest going What do you suggest for
1. A: _________________________ our friends to our party.
B: _________________________.
2. A: _________________________.
B: _________________________. Our neighbours are sleeping.
3. A: _________________________ the next holiday?
B: _________________________ on a trip.
A: That sounds great.
4. A: _________________________ this afternoon? We have nothing to do.
B: _________________________ play some basketball?
IV. Match the sentences in column A and B to make meaningful exchanges.
1. It’s cold here in the park. _____ A. Why don’t you tidy it?
2. I don’t feel very well. _____ B. Shall I answer it?
3. This house is a mess! _____ C. Shall I help you?
4. We need one more person. _____ D. How about going to my house?
5. It’s Jack’s birthday tomorrow. _____ E. Shall we go home?
6. I don’t like this party. _____ F. Why don’t you go to the doctor?
7. We’re late for the theatre. _____ G. Let’s buy him a present.
8. I’m very hungry. _____ H. How about calling Mai?
9. I can hear the phone. _____ I. Let’s take a taxi.
10. I’m going to cook dinner. _____ J. Why don’t you eat this sandwich?
V. Ann and Sam are trying to decide what to do this evening. Complete the conversation with the
phrases given below.
 Why don 't we How about Let’s (x2) shall we could
Sam: So, what shall we do this evening?
Ann: Well, we haven’t got much money. 1 __________________ staying in and watching TV?
Sam: Oh, no. I hate doing that.
Ann: 2 __________________ go out for a walk.
Sam: Yes, great. Where 3 __________________ go?
Ann: 4 __________________ go to the cinema?
Sam: Yes, fine. But the tickets aren’t cheap there.
Ann: That’s true. Well, we 5 __________________ go to the park and have a good time there.
Sam: Yes, I don’t mind. 6 __________________ go there. It’s a wonderful place in our town.

F. Writing
• Writing a summary
I. Write the summary of the conversation between Mai, Nick and Mr. Nam, using the main points
listed below. Remember to insert the words showing the sequence (Firstly, Secondly,...).
Mai: What really is habitat loss and why should we care, Mr. Nam?
Mr. Nam: Habitat loss is the destruction of natural habitats, and it can lead to the extinction of
plant and animal species. There are many reasons why we should care about habitat
loss. For one, it is happening on a massive scale, and at the current rate of destruction,
we could lose up to 50% of all plant and animal species by the end of the century.
Nick: What are the main solutions we should do to prevent habitat loss, sir?
Mr. Nam: There are several things that we should do to prevent habitat loss. Firstly, planting
trees in large numbers or reforestation is a way to save the world’s forests. Every tree
that is planted makes a difference in our environment. Secondly, we should do 3R at
home and at school - reduce, reuse, and recycle. We can recycle home waste because
it’s not hard to separate glass, plastic, and metal from one another.
Mai: Should we continue using single-use plastic, sir?
Mr. Nam: The world’s habitat loss problem is directly related to the world’s excessive use of
single-use plastic products. Where possible, switch to more eco-friendly packaging and
paper straws.
Nick: My dad has installed some LED lights at home. Is it also a good thing to save energy?
Mr. Nam: That’s right. Eco-friendly appliances, such as LED lights, have been designed to use less
energy. These appliances are more energy-efficient: they’re cheaper to run, and the
carbon footprint they leave behind is less.
Mai: What can we do at school to help the environment, sir?
Mr. Nam: You can switch off any appliances that are not in use, and use energy-efficient lights.
The use of these appliances can cut our power bill and do more for the environment at
the same time. Remember that all small changes can make a big difference.
- planting trees in large numbers or reforestation to save the world’s forests
- do 3R at home and at school - reduce, reuse, and recycle
- not hard to separate glass, plastic, and metal from one another
- stop using single-use plastic, and switch to more eco-friendly packaging and paper straws
- replace old appliances with eco-friendly appliances, such as LED lights
- cheaper to run, and the carbon footprint they leave behind is less
- at school, switch off any appliances that are not in use and use energy-efficient lights
- conclusion: all small changes can make a big difference
Mr. Nam talks about the things we should do to prevent habitats loss. Firstly, ____________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 1 (UNIT 10)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. habitat B. appreciate C. balance D. fascinating
2. A. food B. foot C. cook D. book
3. A. flora B. pollute C. combine D. protect
4. A. preserve B. reserve C. fertiliser D. loss
5. A. threat B. Earth C. southern D. north
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. While there are many star systems in our galaxy, there is only one __________ system.
A. universal B. worldly C. solar D. lunar
7. The five __________ of water and the global oceans produce more than half oxygen which humans
breathe.
A. supplies B. bodies C. varieties D. collections
8. Diverse kinds of __________ and fauna make up the biodiversity.
A. flora B. flower C. vegetation D. crop
9. __________ are found where there is not enough regular rainfall to support the growth of a forest,
but not so little that a desert forms.
A. Grass lands B. Grasslands C. Grass plots D. Grass roots
10. The highest __________ on Earth is Mount Everest in Nepal.
A. landmark B. land mass C. landfill D. land form
11. Ecological __________ is a stable one in the numbers of each species in an ecosystem.
A. equality B. balance C. Equivalence D. scale
12. Viet Nam’s national parks and nature __________ offer tremendous diversity.
A. lovers B. reservation C. reserves D. trails
13. The wetlands provide a rich __________ for water plants.
A. habitat B. dwelling C. accommodation D. house
14. The __________ describes who eats whom in the wild.
A. food crop B. food chain C. food quality D. food resource
15. We need to __________ trees by stopping the forest cutting or replanting the plants.
A. preserve B. cure C. store D. care
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word / phrase given below. There are some
extra words that you do not need.
balance importance habitats demand
survival danger activities ecosystems
Threats to Biodiversity
Habitat destruction, also known as loss of habitat, is a process in which a natural habitat
becomes incapable of supporting its native species. This can occur due to various natural reasons, like
16
earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, or forest fires. Moreover, human __________ have also played a
major role in habitat destruction.
17
The increasing __________ for forest products has resulted in the cutting down of forests,
called deforestation. Urbanization has been one of the major causes of forest depletion. It has
affected the environment and resulted in global warming, desertification, and soil erosion.
18
Pollution is a major __________ to biodiversity, affecting a variety of ecosystems and their
people. Water pollution from chemicals, fertilizers, and plastics has an impact on aquatic ecosystems.
Pesticides, heavy metals, and dangerous chemicals can all have an impact on soil fertility and change
the natural 19 __________ of species.
Temperature changes can affect the distribution of species, causing changes in migration
20
manners, and reproductive seasons. Increased sea levels also harm coastal __________ and the
organism that rely on them.
IV. Combine two sentences into one, using a non-defining relative clause.
21. Neil Armstrong was the first person to set foot on the Moon. He reported that the surface was
fine and powdery.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
22. Mark Twain was internationally well-known in literature. He wrote many great novels including
The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
23. Abraham Lincoln was one of the greatest US presidents. He declared freedom for slaves in the
USA in 1863.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
24. Walt Disney was the creator of Mickey Mouse. He was the founder of his own movie production
company.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
25. Thomas Edison was the inventor of the light bulb and phonograph. He was believed by his
teachers to be too stupid to learn.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
26
Deserts play a unique ___________ in the global ecosystem. These regions are not just
27
barren landscapes, but vital habitats that support a wide ___________ of life. Deserts contribute
significantly to the Earth’s biodiversity. Furthermore, they hold ancient secrets in their geological
formations, offering a rich field for scientific research and discovery. Understanding the ecology of
28 29
deserts is not only ___________, but also imperative. It ___________ a window to a world of
remarkable adaptations, diverse species that hold vital keys 30 ___________ life on Earth.
31
The desert is ___________ to a number of plants that hold the adaptation and survival.
Cactus and Joshua trees have a deep root system and moisture-keeping leaves.
Despite the challenging environment, desert fauna, such as camels and fennec foxes, find
32
clever ways to survive. Camels, known as the ___________ of the desert, store fat in their humps,
which can be used as a source of energy and water. The fennec fox has large ears which help not only
in hearing 33 ___________ in preventing heat.
Climate change, 34 ___________ human activities like burning fossil fuels, leads to unexpected
35
rainfalls and extended drought periods. Large regions of deserts are being converted into industrial
___________. This also leads to a decline in biodiversity. Conserving the desert can protect and
preserve the balance of life in deserts.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. title B. character C. task D. role
27. A. variety B. change C. mixture D. division
28. A. delightful B. attractive C. fascinating D. charming
 29. A. clears B. unlocks C. reveals D. opens
30. A. to B. for C. of D. in
31. A. house B. home C. residence D. accommodation
32. A. ferry B. boat C. ship D. tanker
33. A. and B. also C. but also D. but then
34. A. because B. due to C. instead of D. despite
35. A. sites B. spots C. locations D. places
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Flora and fauna are two components of our natural environment that play a vital role in the
ecological balance. Flora refers to the plant life found in a particular region, while fauna refers to the
animal life.
Flora consists of vegetation found both on land and in bodies of water, such as lakes, rivers,
and oceans. It helps in the process of photosynthesis, converting sunlight into energy and releasing
oxygen. Flora also provides habitats and food sources for many animal species.
Fauna shows a wide range of adaptations, allowing animals to survive in different habitats. It
plays an essential role in pollination, and the control of insects. Fauna contributes to the balance of
ecosystems through various ecological roles, such as predator-prey relationships. It provides humans
with sources of food, clothing and companionship.
Flora and fauna are vital to life on Earth. A diverse range of plant and animal species ensures
the availability of essential resources, promotes ecological balance, and adds beauty to our planet.
Flora creates habitats and provides shelter, food sources, and nesting sites for many animal species.
Both flora and fauna hold cultural value. They inspire art, literature and poetry, improving our
connection with nature. Furthermore, experiencing diverse plant and animal life promotes eco-
tourism, contributing to local economies.
(Source: Internet)
36. Flora refers to ___________.
A. the plant life coming to a particular region
B. two components of our natural environment
C. vegetation found both on land and in bodies of water
D. the plant life on the ground found in a particular region
37. All of the following are features of flora EXCEPT ___________.
A. converting sunlight into energy and releasing oxygen
B. providing habitats and food sources for many animal species
C. adding beauty to our planet
D. controlling the number of insects in a region
38. Fauna contributes to the balance of ecosystems because ___________.
A. animal species show a wide range of adaptations
B. animal species perform various ecological roles
C. it provides humans with sources of food, clothing and companionship
D. it ensures the availability of essential resources
39. All of the following prove that flora and fauna together are vital to life on Earth EXCEPT
_________.
A. providing shelter, and nesting sites for many species
B. ensuring the availability of essential resources
C. promoting ecological balance
D. holding cultural value
40. Biodiversity can ___________.
A. improve our connection with nature
B. be helpful in developing local economies
C. promote predator-prey relationships
D. show a wide range of adaptations
VII. Match the questions to their answers, and then practise the conversation with your partner.
There are two extra answers that you do not need.
A. Conservation of an animal refers to the sustainable management of a particular species to
ensure its survival in its natural habitat.
B. The categories include species that are at risk, species that are in danger, and species that
are in extreme danger.
C. We know how plants and animals are valuable to us, so it’s vital to protect them. People
rely on flora and fauna, so we must make sure they are safe.
D. I think the establishment of national parks and nature reserves is very important and the
 government has done it to conserve plants and animals.
E. Habitat loss is the destruction of natural habitats, which can lead to the extinction of plant
and animal species.
F. To protect and preserve the diversity of plant species and their ecosystems.
G. Water quality is directly related to habitat health. If water is seriously polluted, the habitats
will be affected too.
A What are the important tasks to conserve plants and animals?
B 41 _______________________________________________________________________________
A What is the main aim of plant conservation?
B 42 _______________________________________________________________________________
A What is the conservation of an animal?
B 43 _______________________________________________________________________________
A Why do we need to conserve plants and animals?
B 44 _______________________________________________________________________________
A What are the categories of endangered species?
B 45 _______________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Write the summary of the conversation between Mai, Phong and Mr. Nelson, using the main
points listed below.
Mr. Nelson: Fossil fuels are one of the worst things for the environment, but they are still in very
common use all over the world. The use of fossil fuels leaves one of the largest carbon
footprint of all - and the damage is difficult to turn back, but it isn’t an impossible task.
Mai: What do we do about that problem, sir?
Mr. Nelson: If we reduce the use of fossil fuels in our everyday lives, we will benefit the
environment. And we should switch to alternative energy, and we rely less on fossil
fuels.
Phong: Should we change our shopping habits and make them eco-friendly?
Mr. Nelson: It’s an interesting question, Phong. The next time you place an online order or go to the
shop, check the label of items like chocolate or coffee for sustainable products.
Sustainable farming leaves much less impact on the local ecology, and it is all about the
promotion of natural habitats.
Mai: What can we do with the waste from the kitchen?
Mr. Nelson: Fruit and vegetable peels are one of the most common ingredients of home compost.
Compost is good for gardening and can make a big difference to the environment.
Lan: How can we make our own habitat in our house or flat, sir?
Mr. Nelson: You can get the most of your own habitat by planting something - whether a plant or a
small garden. Finally, I would like to emphasize the importance of the cooperation
between local communities and local governments. When local communities and local
governments work together to prevent habitat loss, we can carry out campaigns and
movements to reduce pollution, and prevent habitat destruction more effectively.
Mr. Nelson talks about the things we can do to protect the environment.
46. reduce the use of fossil fuels in our everyday lives, switch to alternative energy, benefit the
environment
Firstly, we should
_____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. check the eco-friendly product labels when going shopping, less impact on the local ecology
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. make compost from organic waste from the kitchen, good for gardening, make a big difference to
the environment
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. get the most of your own habitat by planting something: a plant or a small garden
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. the cooperation between local communities and local governments: carry out campaigns and
movements to reduce pollution, and prevent habitat destruction more effectively
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 2 (UNIT 10)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. role B. pole C. landform D. solar
2. A. nature B. natural C. animal D. landform
3. A. pesticide B. protect C. energy D. ecology
4. A. vital B. essential C. orbit D. outer
5. A. appreciate B. icy C. distance D. medicine
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. A clean environment is __________ for a peaceful and healthy life.
A. urgent B. specified C. essential D. decisive
7. __________ is the study of ecosystems and how the different parts interact together to form a
habitat.
A. Biology B. Botany C. Ecology D. Economics
8. There are a number of ways in which we can spread __________ and educate the public how to
protect the environment.
A. knowledge B. recognition C. acquaintance D. awareness
9. If you have a hamburger for lunch, you may be part of a food __________.
A. train B. chain C. series D. connection
10. Despite the habitat __________ that has occurred globally, there is still hope by protecting 50
percent of the land and ocean around the world.
A. loss B. ruin C. trouble D. disaster
11. I find the natural world endlessly __________.
A. delicate B. delicious C. fascinating D. beautified
12. Plants and animals __________ each other and are mutually interdependent.
A. attract to B. believe in C. trust D. rely on
13. There are many benefits to keeping plants that __________ oxygen indoors in your home and
work spaces.
A. release B. deliver C. rescue D. expel
14. The tiny creature contributes to its ecosystem in ways we are only just beginning to __________.
A. welcome B. thank C. taste D. appreciate
15. The campaign has certainly succeeded in __________ public awareness of the issue.
A. rising B. raising C. moving D. pulling
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word / phrase given below. There are some
extra words that you do not need.
biodiversity home value habitat
rainforest ecosystems balance features
Cat Ba National Park is the country’s first national park to be formed with both forest and
marine habitats. Cat Ba National Park is a typical example of tropical and subtropical marine island 16
________. Generally, the fauna in the park and on Cat Ba Island has a distinct character of coastal
rocky mountainous ecology and 17 __________ typical of the island fauna, demonstrating the diversity
of flora and fauna.
18
According to statistics, Cat Ba National Park is __________ to over 4,000 species of animals
and plants, including many rare species in the Red List. Besides the essential qualities of biodiversity,
the flora is also rich in terms of use 19 __________, with over 1,000 species of medicine plants.
With about 6,450 hectares of sea, marine life in Cat Ba National Park is the richest and most
diversified among Viet Nam’s northern island areas. Because it is home to seabed animals and fishes,
the coral reef ecosystem functions similarly to a tropical 20 __________ on the seafloor.
IV. Combine two sentences into one, using a non-defining relative clause.
21. Mt. Everest is the highest mountain in the world. It is in the Himalayas.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
22. One of the largest cities in the Middle East is Dubai. It is in the United Arab Emirates.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
23. The Dead Sea is the lowest place on the Earth’s surface. It is located in the Middle East between
Jordan and Israel.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
24. Even though the nation consists of more than 250 different cultural groups, English is the official
language in Nigeria. It is the most populous country in Africa.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
25. The newspaper reported a serious earthquake in Osaka. Osaka is Japan’s second largest city after
Tokyo.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Importance of Flora and Fauna
For a better understanding, let’s see the importance of flora and fauna combinedly. Flora and
fauna are of great importance for the support of life on Earth.
26
Flora and fauna collectively ___________ to the biodiversity of our planet, which is vital to
27
maintaining ecosystem stability. A diverse range of plant and animal species ___________ the
availability of essential resources, promotes ecological balance and 28 ___________ natural beauty.
29
Through the ___________ of photosynthesis, flora produces oxygen, a basic component of
the air we breathe. Oxygen is not only vital for human survival but also 30 ___________ the respiration
of various animal species. Therefore, without flora, oxygen levels would significantly drop, causing
fatal 31 ___________ on life.
32
Flora creates habitats and provides shelter, food ___________, and nesting sites for a
multitude of animal species. From the vast canopy of trees in a forest, different types of plants
support diverse animal 33 ___________, ensuring their survival.
Flora and fauna interact in complex ways, forming a delicate ecological balance. For instance,
predators regulate prey populations, 34 ___________ overgrazing or overpopulation. Similarly, certain
35
plants ___________ specific animal species for pollination or seed spread, highlighting the
interdependence between flora and fauna.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. supply B. contribute C. share D. present
27. A. witnesses B. proves C. guarantees D. ensures
28. A. rises B. raises C. gathers D. lifts
29. A. process B. means C. rule D. manner
30. A. approves B. holds C. supports D. carries
31. A. results B. conclusions C. activities D. effects
 32. A. webs B. chains C. sources D. consumption
33. A. states B. communities C. populations D. natives
34. A. encouraging B. preventing C. arresting D. interrupting
35. A. trust B. hold on C. look to D. rely on
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Grassland Animals
Grasslands are wide expanses of space where there is very little rainfall. Trees are unable to grow
because of the lack of water, so the ground is covered in grass. However, a wide range of grassland
animals have adapted to deal with their surroundings. Grasslands fall into one of the two categories:
temperate or tropical. The hot grasslands of Northern Africa and Australia are tropical while
grasslands in North and South America and Siberia in Asia would be temperate.
Grasslands features a unique and diverse climate, which provides home to a wide variety of different
animals. Grazing animals, like antelope and bison, feed on the grass in the grasslands. Predators, like
lions and jaguars, then pick them off and hunt them for food. Giraffes, African elephants, bison, black
rhinoceros, and ostriches are examples of the types of larger animals that inhabit grasslands. They are
also grazing animals which feed on grass in the very large space of grasslands.
Most grasslands are excellent habitats for birds of prey because it is harder for prey to hide on
grasslands. If a bird of prey can cover a large area with a clear sight to the ground, they can easily find
the food they need to survive. The hawk, the owl, and the sparrow are examples of birds of prey.
These birds typically eat smaller grasslands animals, such as prairie dogs, rats, mice, snakes and other
rodents.
In addition to the huge animals in the air and on the ground, a variety of smaller animals inhabit the
tiny cracks or holes of trees, and grass of the grasslands. The small animals and insects represent the
lower level of the food chain and ecosystem.
(Source: Internet)
36. Grasslands, with grass covering the ground and nearly no trees, ___________.
A. have only small animals
B. can support biodiversity
C. help animals adapt to deal with their surroundings
D. cannot support animal life in hot weather
37. Larger animals in grasslands are ___________.
A. animals living in cracks on the ground
B. snakes and rodents like rats and mice
C. animals from surrounding regions
D. large grazing animals and birds
38. Most grasslands are excellent habitats for birds of prey because ___________.
A. prey animals have difficulty finding a place to hide
B. there are large areas of grass
C. there are a large n umber of prey animals there
D. they have visual skills to cover a small area
39. According to the whole passage, we can refer that in grasslands we can also find ___________.
A. tropical grasslands in North America
B. a variety of medicine
C. the food chain
D. rich sources of water
40. The word “them” in paragraph 2 refers to ___________.
A. animals in the lower level of the ecosystem
B. birds of prey
C. predators
D. grazing animals
VII. The students (Lan, Nick and Phong) are talking about the causes of habitat loss and how we can
do to solve the problem. Use the provided cues to complete their conversation. You can use some
extra phrases and expressions to make the conversation meaningful.
Lan: Habitat loss is the cause of extinction for various species, and it is also the reason that many
animal species become endangered.
41
Nick: many plants: cannot grow anymore; soil: soil becomes too poor to support plant life
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Phong: You see, farming often requires large amounts of fertilizers, pesticides, and other harmful
materials. 42 toxic materials: go into the ground, and flow into lakes, rivers, and oceans, poison
 the water and animals
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lan: Cutting down trees in large numbers or deforestation causes the Earth to heat up more
quickly. It can cause global warming and climate change. We should do something to solve the
problems.
43
Nick: set up regulations and rules: protect natural habitats
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Phong: 44 education on the environment: people understand the importance of biodiversity, teach how
everyone can contribute to keeping many different species alive
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lan: Along with education, awareness should be raised, and people will volunteer to protect the
environment.
45
Nick: We should try to replace what is lost. raise money, support the campaigns to rescue
endangered species, grow many young trees
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Read the text and write the summary of the main points, using the notes below.
Viet Nam is a country with a long coastline, and the marine habitat destruction and loss has become
more serious. Let’s consider the effects of that. First, when the marine habitat is destroyed, the
oxygen concentration in the water gets to a lower level due to pollution. The result is that most plants
and animals disappear through death. Humans depend on some sea fish for food. When the food
supplies from the sea drop, humans will definitely suffer from the negative impact. Animals such as
whales, sharks and many others depend on aquatic life for food. Extinction of one species means the
extinction of the others in the food chain.
So we should do things to improve the situation. The first measure that would be useful in stopping
the environmental threat would be to control environmental pollution. Next, overfishing can harm
the aquatic ecology and food chain, so we need fishing regulations to give guidance. Finally, education
will equip us with the necessary skills to protect the environment and avoid the destruction of marine
habitats.
The marine habitat destruction and loss has become more serious in Viet Nam, a country with a long
coastline.
46. oxygen concentration: get to lower levels due to pollution; many marine species: disappear
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. marine habitat destruction and loss: lead to the extinction of several species; extinction of one
species / the extinction of the others in the food chain
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. control environmental pollution
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. overfishing: need fishing regulations to give guidance
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. education: equip us with the necessary skills to protect the environment and avoid the destruction
of marine habitats
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 11. ELECTRONIC DEVICES
A. Pronunciation
● Stress on all words in sentences
Read the following short exchanges, and then write the responses in the right place based on its
pattern of stress.
1. “Would I go straight ahead?” - “Turn right!”
2. “I get bored with the novels!” - “Try these.”
3. “Can the teacher see us talking?” - “Keep silent!”
4. “Would we take the suitcases to our room?” - “Leave them here.”
5. “Smoke is coming out of the TV set.” - “Turn it off!”
6. “Did you go to school by bus this morning?” - “I walked.”
7. “Who rescued the little girl from drowning?” - “Her pet did.”
8. “Is that the last bus to our town?” - “Catch it up!”
9. “Is French the most international language in the world?” - “English is!”
10. “I think these knives are very sharp.” - “Be careful.”
A. OO _______________________________________________________________________
B. OoO _______________________________________________________________________
C. OOo _______________________________________________________________________
D. OOO _______________________________________________________________________

B. Vocabulary
• Electronic devices & Materials
I. Match the following words with their features.
1. plastic _____ A. most of the tyres and tubes used in automobiles are made of it
2. steel _____ B. having many uses in our everyday lives - from electrical wiring to
plumbing fixtures to coins
3. rubber _____ C. good-looking, light in weight, cheap and durable, used in making bags,
bottle caps, bottles, etc.
4. copper _____ D. the production process for creating it from trees generates a large
number of sulfur dioxide emissions
5. cardboard _____ E. highly used in the automobile industry; 50% of a car is made of it
II. Complete the sentences with the appropriate form of the words in Exercise I.
1. Today, _________________ is widely used throughout the world in electronics, plumbing systems,
and more - making it one of mankind’s most important resources.
2. Shoes and clothes made of _________________ are often stretchy and waterproof, which makes
them ideal for activities such as hiking or swimming.
3. A _________________ box works great as a paper bin, dirty laundry bin, gift box or for organising
files.
4. _________________ are used for producing industrial goods like farm vehicles and machines.
5. Goods wrapped in _________________ packets are waterproof and easy for transportation.
III. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
cardboard china steel cork metal
1. Precious _________________ like gold is used in jewellery.
2. When we moved house, we packed all our belongings in _________________ boxes.
3. _________________ is a natural material that is used to seal wine bottles, but also has many other
uses.
4. Most large-scale building projects such as dams, tunnels or bridges would be impossible without
_________________.
5. _________________ is a ceramic material made by heating clay in a special oven, called a kiln.
IV. Complete the sentences with the correct materials. The initial letter of each word has been given
to you.
1. They went hiking in the Alps and slept in a traditional cabin, entirely made of
w_________________.
2. C_________________ clothes are light and comfortable, which is why people like to wear them in
summer.
3. R_________________ is used to make car and bicycle tyres.
4. Thanks to interactive whiteboards, very few teachers have to write with c_________________
these days.
5. Michelangelo sculpted his masterpiece David from one solid block of m_________________.
V. Complete the sentences with the words below.
camera tablet e-reader games console
 laptop MP3 player DVD player
0. My parents use a DVD player to watch films, but I prefer to watch films online or on my phone.
1. Mum takes her _________________ with her on the bus to work. She doesn’t use a tablet or a
laptop. She reads about three books every week.
2. After school, my friends often come round and we play games on the _________________. I’ve got
five controls, so we can all play at the same time.
3. Jack’s smartphone is great for taking photos, but his _________________ is better.
4. My _________________ is better than my laptop. I can do all the same things with it, plus I can
take photos because it’s got a camera. I can’t make phone calls with it though!
5. Dad doesn’t like my tablet or smartphone. He prefers his _________________. It’s heavier, but
easier to use.
6. My _________________ is always in my bag. I use it to listen to music on my ways to school. I don’t
take my phone or tablet to school.
VI. Complete the sentences with the nouns / noun phrases given below.
camcorders aluminum eyestrain 3D printer options
fingertips case touchscreen software window shade
1. When you right-click a file or folder, you get multiple _________________ such as Edit, Copy, Cut,
Delete, Share, etc.
2. _________________ laptops equipped with stylus support allow you to take notes directly on the
screen.
3. She took her violin out of its _________________.
4. Planes and other motor vehicles make use of _________________ because of its strength and
lightness.
5. A team of students from our school used a(n) _________________ to create a solar-powered alarm
to keep deer out of fields.
6. You can find _________________ that record videos in either standard or high-definition
resolution.
7. A good automatic _________________ delivers balanced, optimized lighting in your home at the
touch of a button.
8. When you buy a new computer, you usually get _________________ included at no extra cost.
9. The convenience of browsing information at our _________________ is making it easy for us to
avoid thinking for ourselves.
10. Extended use of computers and other digital devices is one of the most common causes of
_________________.
VII. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
stylish engaged scan privacy
connected purchase virtual shoot
self portraits wireless portable digital
1. Visit our website for a _________________ tour of the museum.
2. Because _________________ technology allows the user to communicate while on the move, you
are rarely out of touch - you don’t need extra cables or adaptors to access office networks.
3. Viewers can get more than 100 channels of incredibly sharp pictures with _________________
cable or satellite.
4. Effective teachers always have new and exciting teaching strategies that will keep their students
motivated and _________________.
5. The laptop’s ultra compact design makes it extremely _________________ and practical.
6. Some people always have their phones on because they feel they must be _________________ all
the time.
7. MacBooks, which are clean, simple, and _________________, have become the gold standard for
laptops.
8. I managed to _________________ a photo of the elephants before they disappeared into the trees.
9. I will just _________________ the article into the computer.
10. We should _________________ eco-friendly electronics to reduce their carbon footprint and
minimize waste.
11. The best way to protect your _________________ on the web is to avoid downloading any apps
that have the ability to track you.
12. Selfie sticks, sometimes known as “monopods”, are a simple way to take _________________ that
capture large groups of friends.
VIII. Complete the sentences with the words given below. There are some extra words that you do
not need.
experience time concentration lifestyle skills
 senses effect programmes benefits apps
1
Electronic devices may have functions to improve speaking, listening and creative
2
________________. Toddlers and preschoolers learn by listening to music or watching
________________on handheld gadgets or television. The visual presentation helps to stimulate their
3
________________. Playing video games on electronic devices helps improve hand-eye
4
coordination. In addition, students are able to understand concepts better by using learning
________________without any assistance.
However, excessive gadget use can make young children refuse to cooperate unless they are allowed
5
to play with their gadgets. It can also lead children to spend less ________________outdoors and
6
limit their social interaction. It may also lead to poor ________________in studies and lack of
interests in day-to-day activities. On the other hand, excessive gadget use can lead to poor health, an
unhealthy 7, ________________and bad eating habits. Furthermore, playing video games of a violent
nature can have a negative 8 ________________on the child’s behaviour.
● Prepositions
IX. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. Young people today are used to interacting ______ content on the web.
2. Being a competitive sport, karate carries ______ it the risk of injury.
3. How to stop getting distracted ______ games while studying?
4. It is easiest to eat chicken legs ______ your fingers.
5. My computer does not detect the camera connected ______ the USB port.
6. They were using animals ______ scientific experiments.
7. The tree outside the window blocks ______ the sun.
8. I made sure that I had all the facts ______ my fingertips before attending the meeting.
9. Our company introduces lighting that you can control ______ your smartphone.
10. Have you ever cheated ______ an exam?

C. Grammar
● suggest /advise /recommend + N-ing / a clause with should
I. Write the correct form of each verb in brackets.
1. The police suggested that anyone who saw the accident (get) ________________ in touch with
them.
2. The doctors recommended that he (have) ________________ an operation because his illness
seemed worse.
3. He suggested (make) ________________ a quick decision because the situation was very urgent.
4. The teacher recommended that the students (finish) ________________ their reports by Friday.
5. The doctor recommended that my father (eat) ________________ more fish and less beef.
6. The director suggested (send) ________________ the contract immediately.
7. The chairman recommended that every member of the council (study) ________________ the
problem carefully before the meeting.
8. The teacher advised (take) ________________ that course before the exam.
II. Complete the sentences with the correct verb form and the same meaning as the first.
1. The doctor said to me, “You should lose weight.”
The doctor advised ___________________________________________________.
The doctor recommended _____________________________________________.
The doctor suggested that _____________________________________________.
2. My teacher said, “You should study harder.”
My teacher suggested that ____________________________________________.
My teacher advised __________________________________________________.
My teacher recommended ____________________________________________.
3. My father said, “Why don’t you get up early to go over your lessons?”
My father suggested _________________________________________________.
My father suggested that _____________________________________________.
4. Jack said, “I think you should see a doctor about that problem.”
Jack recommended __________________________________________________.
5. Lan said, “Let’s go to the cinema.”
Lan suggested ______________________________________________________.
6. Hoa said, “I think we should study at that famous high school.”
Hoa advised _______________________________________________________.
III. Choose the underlined part that needs correcting.
1. The local government suggested that small businesses gave the priority to making products of high
quality.
A. that B. gave C. to D. high quality
2. The teacher suggested that the students had to work hard to pass the final exam.
A. that B. had to C. hard D. final exam
3. My mother always advises to check the labels before buying food at the shops.
A. always B. to check C. before D. at
4. The police recommended that people stayed away from the highway during that terrible storm.
A. stayed B. from C. during D. terrible
5. It was suggested that Jack studied harder before trying to pass the entrance exam to be admitted
to the high school for the gifted.
A. studied B. to pass C. admitted D. the gifted

D. Reading
• Reading about electronic devices
I. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NG (not given). Tick the correct boxes.
Correct the false statements.
3D Printers Used in Schools
3D printers bring concepts and lessons to life in a practical way for students. It is especially
valuable when it comes to STEAM (Science, Technology, Engineering, Art, Mathematics) learning.
Using 3D models in classrooms allows students to get more practical experience in a particular
subject. A 3D printer allows teachers to customize their model directly to their classroom’s needs and
emphasise lessons that students need more time to understand.
While students are reading about dinosaurs in a textbook, a 3D model of a dinosaur in their
hands helps them understand in a new way. 3D printing can attract more attention from students. It is
very useful for students who are visual learners, and seeing a model or holding it in their hands can
help them understand in a faster or more complete way.
On the other hand, 3D printing provides a way to include real-world technology into the
classroom. This is especially useful for schools that offer design, architecture, engineering, or
manufacturing classes, which can use 3D printing in their classrooms to demonstrate models,
and prepare students to work in the industry.
Statements T F NG
1. 3D printing can be used in different subjects in school.   
_________________________________________________________________
 _________________________________________________________________
2. Teachers may use 3D printers to make different items or objects for different   
classes, depending on their needs.
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
3. A 3D model of a dinosaur will make students misunderstand that dinosaurs   
were still alive.
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
4. 3D printing is very valuable for classes where students work with models.   
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
5. The value and importance of 3D printing are the same for all students.   
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
6. STEAM projects teach students all features of 3D printers.   
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
II. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Electronic devices have changed the way we work, play, shop, and communicate.
Smartphones and tablets are the most obvious examples of electronic devices. Other examples of
electronic gadgets include e-readers, smartwatches, laptops and desktop computers.
One of the biggest advantages of electronic devices is that they make our lives easier. Devices
help us stay connected by providing access to email, text messages, video chat and social media.
Electronic devices have revolutionized the world of shopping, allowing online shoppers to buy millions
of products with the tap of a finger or a click of a mouse.
A small electronic device may seem harmless, but the production and disposal of these devices
have a serious effect on the global environment. Many devices contain materials such as lead and
mercury that can pollute the soil if not disposed of properly. Consumers tend to replace old devices
with new ones to upgrade to new technology before their current device wears out. Electronic
devices can improve communication, but they may cause social issues. Relying too much on
smartphones and other electronic devices leads to tech addiction. Online shopping brings an
increased risk for identity theft and other serious crimes. Personal photos, videos and other private
data are at risk of being exposed or lost when stored on an electronic device.
(Source: Internet)
1. Among the electronic devices, _________ are the most commonly used.
A. e-readers and smartwatches
B. smartphones and tablets
C. laptops and desktop computers
D. smartwatches and laptops
2. Electronic devices help us stay connected all the time with _________.
A. the way we work, play, shop, and communicate
B. revolution in the world of shopping
C. buying millions of products with the tap of a finger or a click of a mouse
D. access to various types of online communication
3. All of the following are true about the bad effect of the production and disposal of electronic
devices on the environment EXCEPT that _________.
A. companies have to make small electronic devices due to consumers’ requests
B. many devices contain metals which can pollute the soil in its disposal
C. consumers may throw out old devices to buy new ones
D. the disposal of metals or materials in electronic devices is not done properly
4. Online shopping is beneficial because _________.
A. it leads to tech addiction
B. it brings an increased risk for identity theft
C. online shoppers can buy products easily
D. it may cause other serious crimes
5. The word “gadgets” in paragraph 1 is closest in meaning to _________.
A. items B. tasks C. devices D. features
III. Read the text, and choose the correct answers.
Looking Out for You?
Today, there are more than four million CCTV cameras in Britain. That is one camera for every
fifteen people. The cameras are there to film dangerous or illegal behaviour. But they don’t just watch
criminals - they watch almost all of US, almost all of the time. Every time we use a cashpoint machine,
travel on public transport or go into a shop, a camera records our actions. Shops say that this
technology helps to catch shoplifters - but only by treating everybody as a potential criminal.
Cameras are not the only way of monitoring our actions. Every time you use your mobile
phone, the phone company knows the number of the phone you are calling and how long the call
lasts. It is even possible to work out your location. The police often use this information when they are
investigating serious crimes.
And what about satellites? Are they watching us from space? How much can they see? Anyone
with a computer can download “Google Earth” and get satellite photos of the entire world. Perhaps
governments are even using more powerful satellites to watch their citizens.
Even when you are at home, you are not necessarily safe from surveillance. When you use
your computer to visit websites, you are probably sending and receiving "cookies” without realising it.
Cookies transfer information from your computers to the website and, in theory, could record which
websites you visit. Some cookies, called “zombie cookies”, are very difficult to remove from your
computer. Modern technology is making it easier and easier to stay in contact, but it is also making it
nearly impossible for us to hide.
(Source: Internet}
1. CCTV cameras record the actions of _________.
A. one in fifteen people in the UK
B. four million people in the UK
C. all criminals in the UK
D. nearly everybody in the UK
2. When you use a mobile phone, the company knows _________.
A. the name of the person you are speaking to
B. what you are saying
C. how long you have had the phone
D. where you are
3. The author of the text thinks that governments _________.
A. might use “Google Earth” to help solve crimes
B. might be watching all of us from space
C. might record all of our phone calls
D. might record all of the websites we visit
4. When you surf the Internet, cookies _________.
A. record every letter that you type
B. record your passwords and emails
C. send information to your computer
D. send information to websites
5. What sort of the text is it?
A. an opinion article B. a narrative
C. an argument D. a description
IV. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
Robot Revolution
“Are you tired of cleaning the house? Tired of cooking? Don’t worry. Soon, domestic robots
will do all the boring jobs while you relax.” People were saying this forty years ago, but it hasn’t
1
happened. Now they are saying that again, but this time it’s probably true. Robots will _________
our lives. But will this new technology be a dream or a 2 _________?
Some scientists believe that robots will make 3 _________ a better place. We will build robots
that can do all the dangerous and difficult jobs. There’ll be fewer accidents and life will be safer. They
think that 4 _________ will develop robots that are incredibly intelligent and that will do the jobs of
doctors, pilots and scientists.
However, other scientists have serious 5 _________ about robot technology. They believe that
intelligent robots might be difficult to 6 _________. What happens if robots don’t follow instructions?
The most extreme 7 _________ say that robots will destroy the human race and possibly the entire
planet.
Task 1. Complete the text with the words below.
worries the world predictions nightmare
inventors control change
Task 2. Answer the questions.
1. What prediction from 40 years ago are people repeating now?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why will there be fewer accidents in the future?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What kinds of jobs will robots be able to do in the future?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What are some scientists worried about?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. What are the most extreme predictions?
___________________________________________________________________________________
Task 3. Read the text again and underline two positive predictions and two negative predictions
about robots. Then write them down.
Positive predictions:
1. _________________________________________________________________________________
2. _________________________________________________________________________________
Negative predictions:
3. _________________________________________________________________________________
4. _________________________________________________________________________________
V. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
Vacuum Shoes
They may look 1 __________ ski boots, but they are in fact a new concept from Indonesian
designer Adika Triyugo. They are called Foki vacuum shoes, and they have a built-in vacuum cleaner
that sucks up dust as you walk around your house.
2
According __________ research, on average, we spend almost 90 hours every year
vacuuming the house. Furthermore, doctors say that vacuuming the floor with a traditional vacuum
cleaner is bad for your back. The designer claims that vacuuming with Foki shoes requires no extra
effort and saves time. You just put them 3 __________ in the morning and by the end 4 __________
the day, your floors and carpets will be clean.
It isn’t absolutely clear 5 __________ long the batteries will last, or how noisy the shoes will be.
Other questions that spring to mind are: will you be able 6 __________ lift your feet off the ground
7
easily while the shoes are sucking, and where will they store __________ dirt? (Possibly in your
socks?)
The shoes are certainly not going to win any fashion awards - most people won’t want to wear
8
them when they answer the door - but they might make housework much easier __________
quicker.
Task 1. Complete the text with appropriate words.
Task 2. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), or F (false). Correct the false statements.
1. The vacuum cleaner is part of the shoe.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. People spend nearly 90 hours a year doing housework.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Doctors are worried that the shoes will be bad for your back.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. The writer doesn’t know where the shoes will store the dirt.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. The writer thinks the shoes are very fashionable.
___________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
What’s the Big Idea?
When people try to make predictions about the future, they usually get them completely wrong, like
the prediction made by T.J. Watson, the head of IBM, in 1943: “I think there may be a market for five
computers in total in the world”. Today, about 45 million PCs are sold every year in the USA alone.
Nanotechnology is the science of building tiny machines, so small that you cannot see them. Most
scientists agree that nanotechnology will change our lives in the future – but how? It’s difficult to
predict whether this new technology will be like a wonderful dream, or a terrifying nightmare.
The dream
In the 1966 science fiction film Fantastic Voyage, an inventor develops an amazing new way to cure
diseases. He makes a group of scientists and their submarine incredibly small and injects them all into
a patient. They then travel around the body of the patient, visiting the different parts and repairing
them. Of course, this is just a fantasy - but the reality of nanotechnology is not very different.
Scientists are already making nanobots, tiny robots that are smaller than a virus. In the future, doctors
might be able to inject these into a patient, and the nanobots will travel around the body and repair
any damage. They’ll be able to cure almost every disease.
The nightmare
Some people are worried that nanotechnology could be difficult to control. Nanobots might escape
into the environment and damage people, plants and animals. Others have even more serious
worries. Eric Drexler is a futurist, a scientist who makes predictions about the future. In his book,
Engines of Creation, he predicted the invention of nanobots. He also described a special kind of
nanobots that can make a copy of itself using the material around it - and this is where the nightmare
begins. In Michael Crichton’s book Prey, nanobots make copies of themselves so quickly that they use
all the materials around and then look for more ... and more, and more, eventually “eating” the
world. Some people are worried that this might really happen. The most extreme predictions (which
very few scientists believe) say that nanobots could destroy the entire planet in about three hours!
(Source: Internet)
Task 1. Read the text. Which paragraph contains the information to complete the sentences?
Complete them in your own words.
1. Nanobots could cure almost every disease because they
____________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
2. Nanobots could make the world a much worse place because they might
_______________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
Task 2. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), or F (false). Correct the false statements.
1. T.J. Watson was correct about the future of the PC.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Most scientists think that nanotechnology will be important in the future.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. It’s easy to predict how nanotechnology will affect our lives.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. In 1966, an inventor developed a new way to cure diseases.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. In the future, scientists might be able to cure diseases by injecting nanobots into patients.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Eric Drexler invented nanobots.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. Most scientists are worried that nanobots could destroy the world in about three hours.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Task 3. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D for each question.
1. When people make predictions about the future, they _______________.
A. often make mistakes
B. make predictions for a long period of time
C. are often pessimistic and negative
D. may be right or wrong
2. All of the following are true about nanotechnology EXCEPT that _______________.
A. it is the world of tiny things
B. it can be used for many purposes
C. it can travel around the world
D. it can be used for good or bad causes
2. In the science fiction film Fantastic Voyage, the prediction which has been proved true is that
_______________.
A. submarines injected into a patient can repair damage in some organs
B. tiny items injected into a patient can travel around the body and cure diseases
C. viruses can be used to carry nanobots around the body and cure diseases
D. fantasy films have become a trend in the film industry
3. The authors of the books mentioned in the text have made all the following predictions about
nanobots EXCEPT that _______________.
A. they may damage the environment
B. they might escape from human control
C. they make material to destroy the world
D. they may make copies of themselves and destroy the world
4. The common prediction in the books Engines of Creation and Prey is that _______________.
A. nanobots may destroy the world
B. nanobots may make copies of themselves
C. people are worried that nanotechnology would control the world
D. nanobots “eat” the same material around them
Task 4. Match the underlined words in the text with the definitions below.
1. very frightening __________________
2. to make a person who is ill better __________________
3. whole, complete __________________
4. a person who goes to see a doctor __________________
5. the world around us __________________
6. very small __________________
7. a bad dream __________________
8. an imaginary situation __________________
9. a vehicle that can travel underwater __________________
VII. Read the blogs and do the tasks that follow.
 _______________________________
Like most people, we hate cleaning our oven. It’s a job that isn’t done very often and usually it’s only
when the oven is horrible and smelly. Anyway, guess what? We’ve just got a brand new, pyrolytic
oven and it’s amazing. When the oven is dirty or greasy, you switch on the pyrolytic function. The
oven door is locked, the temperature is raised to around 500°C and the food and grease is burned off.
A couple of hours later, at the end of the process, your oven is spotless. It’s like magic.
Jane, Birmingham
 _______________________________
There’s an induction hob in our new flat and it’s brilliant. There’s a magnetic coil under the surface
and when electricity travels through it, electromagnetic energy is created. This is transferred to the
base of the pan, which must be iron, and the contents of the pan are heated really fast. When you
remove the pan, you won’t burn yourself on the hob because the pan is hot, not the hob. So induction
hobs are really quick, safe and efficient. The only disadvantage is they’re more expensive to buy.
Jack, London
 _______________________________
If you love the smell of freshly made bread, you should definitely get an electric bread maker. You
weigh all the ingredients into a special metal pan, put the pan into the machine, close the lid, select
the programme on the control panel and switch it on. That’s it until the machine starts beeping to tell
you the bread is ready. Everything is done by the machine - the ingredients are mixed, the mixture is
heated, and then the bread is baked. The only thing the machine doesn’t do is slice it and eat it.
Kate, Exeter
(Adapted from Studio)
Task 1. Complete the blogs with the headings below.
a. As quick as a flash
b. Bake it yourself
c. Like new every time
Task 2. Read the blogs again. Who or what does these things. Write the name of the person or the
device.
1. _______________________________ switches on the oven.
2. _______________________________ locks the oven door.
3. _______________________________ cleans the dirt and grease.
4. _______________________________ puts the pan on the hob.
5. _______________________________ creates electromagnetic energy.
6. _______________________________ heats the contents of the pan.
7. _______________________________ weighs the ingredients to make bread.
8. _______________________________ indicates that the bread is ready.
9. _______________________________ doesn’t slice the bread.
VIII. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Camera Vision
36-year-old Canadian film-maker Rob Spence doesn’t seem unusual. You wouldn’t realise it at
first, but one of his eyes is false. But this is not the most unusual thing about him. Inside this false eye
Spence has a wireless video camera. This camera is not connected to his brain and has not improved
his eyesight. It records everything he sees. The camera runs on a very small battery and it has a
transmitter, a device which allows Spence to send an image of what he is seeing at any moment to a
computer.
Spence damaged his right eye at the age of thirteen while he was playing with his
grandfather’s gun on a visit to Ireland. After the accident his vision got worse until he became
completely blind in that eye. Three years ago, he had an operation to remove this eye and to insert a
false one. And it is the false eye that now contains his miniature video camera.
Spence knew that building a camera that was small enough to fit inside the eye would not be
easy, so he contacted Dr. Steve Mann, a cyborgs scientist at the University of Toronto. Cyborgs are
machines that combine natural and artificial systems. Together Spence and Mann succeeded in
building a device which Time magazine described as one of the best inventions of the year.
Even though his project is still quite new, Spence says that many people have already told him
that they don’t like being filmed. He finds this strange as the same people have no problems with the
hundreds of surveillance cameras that film them every day at school, in the underground and in
shopping centres. He hopes that his project will make people think more about how governments and
organisations monitor these cameras and the information they record.
(Adapted from i-Discover)
1. What does Rob Spence’s camera do?
A. helps him see better
B. films what he sees
C. takes photos of everything
2. The camera is powered by _____________.
A. a computer B. a transmitter C. a tiny battery
3. Why did Spence go blind in one eye?
A. He had an accident with a gun.
B. An operation went wrong.
C. His grandfather accidentally shot him.
4. Why did Spence approach Dr Mann for help in building his eye camera?
A. Dr. Mann was a specialist in building tiny cameras.
B. Dr. Mann had experience in working with eye devices.
C. Dr. Mann was an expert in technology which connects humans with man-made devices.
5. What does Spence hope people will learn from his project?
A. to question how much they are monitored
B. to feel comfortable when they are filmed
C. how to record information

E. Speaking
• Talking about an electronic device which is important to you
I. Complete the conversation with the answers given below. Then practise it with your partner.
A. The smartboard improves learning efficiency because it can improve students’ motivation,
involve them in the educational process more effectively, and improve concentration.
B. Teachers can return to previous pages when necessary.
C. Because it is controlled by a computer or a laptop. Regular touches on the surface allow us to
 work freely with tables and images as if we were working on a large tablet.
D. It’s an interactive whiteboard with a large touchscreen of the size of a large TV.
E. We can easily perform a variety of functions, such as writing, changing, highlighting text, and
so on.
Jack: Our school is going to install a smartboard in each classroom. It’s good news, Mai!
Mai: A smartboard! What is it, Jack?
1
Jack: ____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: Can we connect it to a computer?
Jack: Of course. 2 _____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: What can we do with a smartboard?
3
Jack: ____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: Do you know the advantages of using a smartboard?
Jack: Several, I think. 4 _______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: Can we see the slides again if we want?
Jack: Yes. 5 ________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
• Everyday English: Persuading someone to do something and responding
II. Put the following expressions into the correct categories.
OK, I got what you mean. Sorry, I didn’t get your point.
Do you understand? Are you following me?
I see I don’t get it.
What do you mean? I’m not sure I got your point.
 Do you understand what I mean. I understand.
I got it I understand what you mean.
Do you understand what I’m saying. I don’t quite follow you.
Any questions? Got it?
I beg your pardon, I don’t quite understand.
I’m sorry. I don’t understand what you mean.
Checking for understanding:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Showing understanding:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Expressing lack of understanding:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Read the conversation and underline the expressions of checking understanding and responding.
A: So did you call Peter about confirming the delivery?
B: You mean the date of delivery?
A: Yes, and then you need to enter the delivery date into the speadsheet.
B: Here. See what I mean?
A: Oh, yeah. Thanks.
B: I forgot to do last month, and the boss went crazy.
A: What do you mean?
B: She was really angry. She was shouting at me and screaming, you know. She was horrible to me.
A: What are you saying?
B: Nothing. What I’m trying to say is you made a little mistake, but it meant the company lost money.
That’s why the boss was really angry.

F. Writing
• Writing a passage about the current and future capabilities of one’s
favourite electronic device.
Write a paragraph about smartboards in classrooms, using the cues given below.
- smartboards: connected to computer, have the capability of saving our work, notes, and
presentations and sharing them with others
- connect the smartboard to a computer and an LCD projector, turn on the smartboard and log
in
- our fingertip: select an icon and double click to open a file
- touch the formatting toolbar: access specialty tools, such as Save, Pen, Erase, and Undo/ Redo
- smartboard pens: used to write and draw just like you would do with an ordinary pen; put the
pen back in the tray and pick up a different colour
- smartboards: more popular in schools - make learning interactive, teachers: prepare the
curriculum for students of different learning styles
Smartboards are quickly replacing whiteboards in classrooms. Because they are__________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 1 (UNIT 11)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. camcorder B. plastic C. portable D. vacuum
2. A. wireless B. medical C. printer D. plastic
3. A. rubber B. suck C. touchscreen D. computer
4. A. virtual B. portable C. conduct D. steel
5. A. copper B. piece C. cardboard D. cleaner
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. When it comes to __________ laptops, interaction becomes a significant advantage due to the
direct control of content with your fingertips.
A. touchline B. touchpad C. touchscreen D. touchstone
7. __________ is a common condition that occurs when your eyes get tired from staring at computer
screens and other digital devices.
A. Eyestrain B. Eyelet C. Eyesore D. Eyesight
8. Smartphones have become a necessity in today’s world, and thanks to new technologies,
everything is now within your __________.
A. fingerprint B. fingermark C. fingerboard D. fingertips
9. If a laptop __________ got accidentally broken, then you can repair it by using simple DIY methods.
A. basket B. carton C. case D. drawer
10. __________ has various unique properties, including its lightweight, high resistance to corrosion,
which makes it a unique material.
A. Copper B. Aluminum C. Lead D. Carton
11. With hackers getting smarter, all Internet users should know how to protect their __________ in
the digital world.
A. privacy B. isolation C. separation D. secrecy
12. A 3D __________ can be used to create models of literary characters or scenes from a story, which
can help students understand the story better.
A. graphic B. effect C. model D. printer
13. We can use our smartphone to control the amount of light coming into our home through the
automatic window __________.
A. shadow B. shade C. screen D. curtain
14. If these settings are changed, it can lead to missing __________ in the menu.
A. options B. alternatives C. pages D. preferences
15. Getting technology __________ may help you obtain or maintain certain job positions.
A. impacts B. advances C. skills D. science
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word / phrase given below. There are some
extra words that you do not need.
run collect return move
switch pick up ensure turn
Lefant Robotic Vacuum Cleaner
The vacuum robot is capable of running under beds and sofas where dirt hides. Its double
16
brushes __________ every comer and edge of the room is cleaned without missing. It is ideal for
17
pet owners because its suction port can __________ dust, pet hair, and small items effectively on
18
hard floors and carpets. The robotic vacuum cleaner can flexibly __________ between different
modes via the app: random cleaning, spot cleaning, schedule cleaning and so on. It has 13 pairs of
built-in sensors which make it effectively detect the surrounding environment and avoid getting stuck
or falling downstairs. This model can 19 __________ up to 120 minutes on a single charge. When there
20
is only 15% of the battery left, the robot will automatically __________ to the charge station. You
can control your robot via the remote control, and you can also schedule a cleaning with the Lefant
app even if you are not at home.
IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
21. His parents advised that he __________ well in his exams.
A. does B. did C. will do D. should do
22. I suggested that they __________ loudly in the school library.
A. don’t talk B. didn’t talk C. should talk D. not talk
23. His wife suggested he __________ on time when he went for the job interview.
A. would arrive B. should arrive C. may arrive D. might arrive
24. The doctor recommended that John __________ for a couple of days.
A. rest B. would rest C. could rest D. might rest
25. Our teacher recommended the essay to correct mistakes twice before handing it in __________.
A. read B. to read C. reading D. to reading
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
A digital camera can be used to take photos or 26 __________ clips digitally. The importance of
the camera is not in the device itself, but in what it produces - photographs and videos have become
27
__________ to communication, education, and preservation of history.
A picture is 28 __________ a thousand words. Photos and videos taken with cameras are used
29
to communicate or to tell stories. A camera is a tool of everyday life. Just __________ an album on
Facebook and you will have read a kind of story.
Some people learn by hearing, others by writing, and some by seeing. The camera has added a
30 31
new dimension to education, __________ photographs and videos to become learning
_________. Imagine a medical school textbook without photographs, and it would be hard for
students to visualize the 32 __________.
33
The camera helps to create and preserve memories of historical or emotional __________.
Famous photographs of notable 34 __________ and events from history were made 35
__________ by
the camera. Every day babies are born, people get married, and all of it is documented with cameras,
a source of helping US remember our past. The camera is a valuable source to preserve history.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. occupy B. attract C. catch D. capture
27. A. vital B. lively C. necessary D. active
28. A. equal B. costing C. worth D. exchangeable
29. A. browse B. inspect C. examine D. scan
30. A. supporting B. approving C. admitting D. allowing
31. A. instrument B. machine C. tool D. device
32. A. substances B. contents C. ingredients Đ. capacities
33. A. advantage B. usefulness C. quality D. value
34. A. minutes B. moments C. periods D. flashes
35 A. acceptable B. thinkable C. possible D. imaginable
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
When used properly, mobile phones provide ways to offer creative learning, and improve
students’ social experiences. However, smartphones may lead to some problems.
 While teachers can use activities on mobile phones to make students be more engaged in
lessons, the device can also create distractions in the classroom. Rather than watching a teacher’s
lecture, students may use their phones to text their friends, use social media apps, watch videos or
browse the web. It can cause students to miss out on important information taught in lessons.
Moreover, students from low-income families may not be able to afford to buy smartphones, so they
miss out the online lessons on smartphones. Students can also use their phones to text rumours to
each other or make threats against classmates. Cyberbullying like that can cause physical and
emotional harm to students. Students also use the devices to take pictures of exam questions
beforehand and share answers during tests. They may also use their phones to cheat by searching
Google for answers.
Teachers and parents can take steps to prevent some of the problems with using phones in
classrooms. Teachers can establish rules that allow mobile phones for specific learning purposes. They
can also help students stay engaged through a mix of traditional and online activities to try to boost
learning and attention levels. Along with making rules, parents can install parental control apps that
restrict access to social media and other nonessential apps during school hours.
(Source: Internet)
36. Smartphones can make students become distracted during school hours by __________.
A. engaging in online lessons or activities
B. chatting with friends on social media apps
C. watching teacher’s lectures
D. using their mobile phones for creative learning
37. The cost of smartphones __________.
A. makes students miss out on important information in teachers’ lectures
B. is not so high and students from low-income families can own them easily
C. creates distractions in the classroom
D. can lead to an unequal learning experience for students
38. All of the following are examples of cyberbullying EXCEPT on the phones __________.
A. sharing answers during tests
B. texting rumours to each other
C. make threats against classmates
D. doing something to cause physical and emotional harm to their friends
39. Besides establishing rules in using smartphones in classrooms, teacher can __________ to
promote students’ attention in class.
A. create online lessons and activities
B. ask parents to install control apps on access to social media
C. combine online lessons and traditional lectures
D. prevent the use of mobile phones in classrooms
40. The word “they” in the last paragraph refers to __________.
A. students B. teachers C. purposes D. rules
VII. Complete the conversation with the answers below. There is one extra answer that you do not
need.
A. the trips are collections of VR panoramas - 360° panoramas and 3D images.
B. the clips of the trips include details, and questions that make the clips easy to be related to
the school’s curriculum.
C. virtual reality allows teachers to bring their lessons to life.
D. teachers will have everything they need to take the classes on virtual reality tours
E. teachers are able to choose various trips to lead a class through a virtual field trip.
F. the VR app enables teachers to take students on virtual trips to places like museums,
underwater, and outer space.
Mi: I’ve heard about VR devices. Are they useful for learning in our classroom, Nick?
Nick: Certainly. 41 ___________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Mi: How do you mean that?
42
Nick: ___________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
These expeditions are collections of linked VR contents and supporting materials that are
taken from the curriculum.
Mi: What is the quality of the video clips?
43
Nick: ___________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Mi: You said the VR materials were taken from the curriculum?
Nick: That’s right. 44 _________________________________________________________________
 ____________________________________________________________________________.
Mi: How can teachers use VR for all the classes?
Nick: There is a virtual reality classroom pack, and 45 ___________________________________________________________
_____________________________________: a tablet, virtual reality viewers, phones, a router
to connect them all, and a transport case to move the equipment between classrooms.
Mi: Thank you for your helpful information about VR. I hope we will enjoy VR in our classrooms
soon.
Nick: So do I.
VIII. Write the sentences about digital textbooks, using the notes below. Remember to insert the
words showing sequence (Firstly / Secondly,...).
Traditional textbooks became a thing of the past, and it is time for digital textbooks. They have several
advantages for students.
46. be lightweight, easy to access and maintain; help: save money (they have no cost of shipping and
delivery)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. have the ability: hold thousands of worksheets, books, and homework assignments, and help
students save space
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. be eco-friendly, come with a variety of multimedia features
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. students: use “Quick Search” function, instantly search for information on the Internet, and
highlight the text
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. digital textbooks like tablets: used anywhere and anytime, very useful for our learning on the go
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST 2 (UNIT 11)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. shade B. virtual C. portrait D. player
2. A. camcorder B. conduct C. control D. connect
3. A. additional B. critical C. quality D. digital
4. A. wireless B. touchscreen C. music D. plastic
5. A. vacuum B. electronic C. record D. privacy
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Mary wondered whether she would choose a __________ or unisex laptop bag for her new
MacBook.
A. stylish B. current C. favourite D. fashion
7. The equipment is lightweight, __________ and easy to store.
A. manageable B. transferable C. movable D. portable
8. With __________ photography, images of construction sites can be transmitted via the Internet to
architects and engineers.
A. symbolic B. notable C. digital D. numeral
9. The software automatically scans newly __________ machines on the network for viruses.
A. combined B. connected C. united D. joined
10. During a typical teacher lecture, you can never guarantee that the students are __________ in
what they are learning.
A. dealing B. employed C. engaged D. connected
11. __________ learning doesn’t replace traditional educational tools.
A. Particular B. Quality C. Practical D. Virtual
12. __________ networks are easier and cheaper due to no installation of cables.
A. Communication B. Wireless C. Furnished D. Electrical
13. The film was __________ on location in Southern India.
A. shot B. fired C. attacked D. hunted
14. Sometimes the electronic devices we __________ online cannot be repaired, which is a waste of
money.
A. acquired B. marketed C. purchased D. invested
15. The survey says that up to 95 percent of young people have taken a selfie while just 44 percent of
over 55s have taken a __________.
A. self-access B. self-portrait C. self-assessment D. self-assurance
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word / phrase given below. There are some
extra words that you do not need.
technique components functions results
discussions browsers sensors technology
Here are some of the most popular educational robots that are currently being used in the classroom.
NAO
NAO is one of the most popular educational robots. This 58-centimetre-high robot has two cameras
16
and four microphones, as well as many other __________ that allow the robot to interact with a
17
classroom in the same way a human would. NAO can speak to students, listen to __________ and
teach any subject.
OWI 535
18
For secondary students who can work with more advanced __________, OWI 535 has been used
effectively. It can perform a range of different 19 __________, and it is fairly easy for students to make
adjustments and customizations.
LEGO Mindstorms EV3
Lego has created an educational robot, and their Mindstorms EV3 is a more advanced robot that is
20
designed for use by children over the age of 10. The robot with sensors, and over 500 __________
can make several movements among many other functions.
IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
21. The residents recommended that the local authorities __________ more about the problem of air
pollution.
A. will do B. would do C. should do D. might do
22. We suggested __________ the meeting outside because it was such a beautiful evening.
A. have B. having C. to have D. be having
23. The school principal suggested that tenth-grade students __________ their courses in the first
two weeks of the school year.
A. changed B. changing C. would change D. should change
24. The doctor recommended __________ vitamins either from foods or from supplementary tablets.
A. take B. to take C. took D. taking
25. Parents suggested that the school __________ more equipment of the new technology.
A. buy B. will buy C. may buy D. might buy
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
An e-reader is a handheld device that allows you to read digital books, magazines, newspapers or
documents. Reading material is downloaded from online stores via the Internet. You can also
download books to a computer and then 26 __________ them to your e-reader via a USB cable. There
27
are a(n) __________ number of free classic books (out of copyright) available to fill your digital
library at 28 __________. Your own documents can be 29 to your e-reader, too.
30
Most models of an e-reader store at least 1,000 books. Their screens allow you to read __________
in bright sunlight without glare, and some models include a built-in light for night reading. Some later
models allow you to customize the fonts that you see and 31 __________ the text size. The screen can
be rotated for better 32 __________ of pictures, diagrams, maps, etc.
Using the page-tuming function 33 __________ you feel as if you are reading a real book – with turning
buttons for left- and right-handed readers. In addition, readers can make notes and highlight pieces of
34
text, and add their own remarks __________ the text. Finally, with automatic bookmark, you can
continue reading the page where you stop 35 __________.
(Source: Internet}
26. A. carry B. transport C. direct D. transfer
27. A. unlimited B. large C. record D. maximum
28. A. any cost B. all cost C. no cost D. no extra cost
29. A. rescued B. saved C. downloaded D. browsed
30. A. even B. even as C. even so D. even though
31. A. arrange B. settle C. organise D. adjust
32. A. outlining B. opening C. viewing D. inspecting
33. A. gets B. makes C. causes D. forces
34. A. to B. for C. with D. in
35. A. the last moment B. first and last C. the last minute D. the last time
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
 What are the Benefits of Laptops in School?
Laptops are becoming common in secondary education. While laptops may present opportunities for
distraction, using portable laptops in classrooms can yield several significant benefits.
Computer skills are a fundamental part of education. Students who use basic computer skills have a
significant advantage over students that have no knowledge of computers. Allowing laptops in the
classroom reinforces computer skills and note-taking skills on laptops can be very beneficial.
Another benefit of using laptops in classrooms is that using them is more fun for students than simply
sitting at a desk and listening to a lecture with a pad of paper and a pen. Students that have fun in the
classroom are more likely to become more active in their studies. Laptops can provide a high level of
interaction between teachers, students, and subject matter. For instance, a teacher could challenge
students to find the answer to a question about history or other any subject using their laptops
online. This would force students to carry out quick research and use creativity to find the answer,
rather than skimming through a thick textbook.
Moreover, laptops can help students stay organised and remember schoolwork. When you have six or
more classes, it is easy to misplace a worksheet or forget about an assignment. If teachers distribute
assignments digitally, students can easily review their work all in one place. Digital copies of work also
help students by making it easy to edit or change work. This can be a benefit for teachers as well:
having students turn work in via email or another digital system is easier than collecting and sorting
through sheets of paper. Additionally, digital assignments allow students that have to miss school to
turn in work remotely.
(Source: Internet)
36. Laptops are beneficial to students because __________.
A. they have no bad effect on studies
B. they help students more familiar with basic computer skills
C. computing is becoming common in secondary education
D. students don’t need note-taking skills anymore
37. In order to find out answers to a question in any subject, students can __________.
A. have a higher level of interaction on social media
B. skim through a thick textbook for the answer
C. have no difficulty doing it due to their creativity
D. search on the Internet for the answer quickly
38. When teachers distribute assignments digitally, with laptops students can __________.
A. place the worksheets at their own places
B. look at the assignments in one place easily
C. ask teachers to put the assignments in one place
D. easily edit or change their work after handing it in
39. Distributing assignments digitally, teachers can via the Internet __________.
A. collect students’ assignments more easily
B. collect students’ assignments at the same time
C. mark and correct students’ assignments
D. deal with more classes
40. The word “sorting” in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to __________.
A. upsetting something
B. distributing something
C. putting something in an order
D. reading and correcting something
VII. Use the following cues about the benefits of smart tables for classrooms to make a short
presentation, and then practise it with your partner.
41. smart tables: allow small groups of students to work together, face to face, to complete problem-
solving activities on one interactive surface
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
42. do everything from sharing files and working on projects together to playing games and learning
new concepts
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
43. promote teamwork skills and offers an opportunity to give tasks of different levels to students
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
44. learning: become enjoyable and entertaining for students of all ages
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
45. save money because the teacher does not have to print paper materials
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Write the sentences about 3D printers, using the notes below. Remember to insert the words
showing sequence (Firstly, Secondly,...).
46. 3D printers: allow students / get more practical experience / a particular subject; 3D printers in
schools: used / boost analytical thinking / increase understanding
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. students: see models of concepts, investigate the copy of objects, learn a lesson in a new way
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. help students: remember what they learn, stayed engaged and motivated
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. in science classes, students: create 3D models of body parts / in history classes, a 3D printer: print
copies of historical objects of important events or time periods
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. 3D printers: a 21st-century learning tool / expect / see in more classrooms
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 12. CAREER CHOICES
A. Pronunciation
● Intonation in statements used as questions
Mark the questions with the correct tone, using the falling arrow (↘) or the rising arrow (↗). Then
practise the short exchanges with a partner.
1. A: This summer I’ll work as a volunteer for the Green Campaign in the countryside.
B: You’ll work as a volunteer for the Green Campaign? Good news. What will you do?
2. A: I’ll teach English to a class of disadvantaged children.
B: You’ll teach English to a class of disadvantaged children? It’s fantastic. How old are the
children?
3. A: I also help them practise some songs with my guitar in the evening.
B: You’ll also help them practise some songs in the evening? What songs will you teach them?
4. A: At the weekend, we come and help the elderly in the village.
B: You’ll come and help the elderly in the village too? What can you help them?
5. A: I think a career in journalism needs several skills.
B: A journalist needs several skills? What is the most important skill?
6. A: I’m very interested in dance, but for my future career I will work as a fashion designer.
B: You’ll work as a fashion designer? What course do you follow?
7. A: Good architects have a natural feeling for space and dimensions.
B: Have a natural feeling for space and dimensions? Đo you mean they should have good
imagination?
8. A: I’m in a rock band but my parents don’t like that idea at all, so I’ve decided to do the
tourism course.
B: You’ll work as a tour guide? How long does the course last?

B. Vocabulary
• Jobs
I. Complete the sentences with the nouns given below. Each word must be used only once.
description teaching passion sense vocation
orientation training assembly career sessions
1. The department has arranged a(n) _________________ session for new employees.
2. She was on the first step of the _________________ ladder.
3. She believes that she has found her true _________________ in life.
4. New staff have received a week’s _________________ in how to use the system.
5. Participants will have the opportunity to attend _________________ on a wide variety of topics.
6. If you have lost _________________ for your career, then your performance is probably getting
worse.
7. My cold is so bad that I have lost my _________________ of smell.
8. A job _________________ is a document that clearly states essential job requirements, job duties,
job responsibilities, and skills required to perform a specific role.
9. The frame needs to be strong enough to support the engine _________________.
10. Applicants for the positions in our school must hold a recognised _________________
qualification.
II. Complete the sentences with the adjectives given below.
vocational repetitive informative formal life-long
creative academic knowledgeable demanding life-and-death
1. Knowledge and wisdom can be gained from experience rather than from _____________
education.
2. People with inadequate _________________ training find it difficult to re-enter the workforce.
3. Her _________________ ambition had been to learn how to fly.
4. She is very _________________ about all kinds of music.
5. We have got some _________________ decisions to make at the next board meeting that will
determine the fate of the company.
6. Something that is _________________ involves doing the same thing over and over again.
7. Police work is physically _________________ and stressful.
8. Though written for children aged 8-12, the book is engaging and _________________ for adults.
9. We are looking for practical experience as well as _________________ achievement.
10. They use _________________ ways to market their services to customers.
• Vocabulary for Reading
III. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
teamwork course collaboration inquiring coordination
software must face-to-face path ladder
1. Activities such as drawing and colouring can improve hand-eye _________________.
2. His new novel is a(n) _________________ for all lovers of adventure.
3. Her determination, _________________ skills and leadership capabilities convinced us that she was
perfect for the job.
4. I don’t know what future career _________________ might suit me but I am told I relate well to
people.
5. A _________________ engineer is someone whose job is to create computer programmes.
6. A vocational _________________ is focused on practical work, preparing students for a particular
trade or skilled profession.
7. She wrote the book in _________________ with one of her students.
8. She was anxious to move up the promotion _________________.
9. _________________ contact can be important for good working relationships.
10. _________________ minds want to know “Do you have any ambitions for another job?”
● Prepositions
IV. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. This course prepares students _________________ middle and senior managerial positions.
2. This book offers several tips to help you discover and develop your own sense _________________
personal style.
3. He is very knowledgeable _________________ Vietnamese literature.
4. We offer online courses _________________ students to take their education into their hands.
5. The Science Museum is open _________________ the public.
6. She has applied _________________ a job with an insurance company.
7. I dream _________________ one day working for myself and not having a boss.
8. You should move confidently _________________ your career path to achieve your career goals.
9. She agreed to collaborate _________________ him in writing her biography.
10. A pair of goggles is a must _________________ diving.

C. Grammar
• Adverbial clauses of concession, result, and reason
I. Complete the gaps in the sentences with either because or although.
1. ______________ he didn’t understand, he asked the teacher to explain.
2. ______________ he understood the lesson, he asked the teacher to explain it again.
3. ______________ it was raining hard, the two teams continued to play football.
4. The referee decided to stop the match ______________ it was raining hard.
5. ______________ I shouted very loudly, I couldn’t make myself heard.
6. He stopped going to work ______________ his doctor had given him strict instructions to stay in
bed for a few days.
7. He decided to take the course ______________ it cost a lot of money.
8. I couldn’t post the letter ______________ I didn’t have any stamps.
II. Combine the sentences, using clauses of concession with although or though. Use correct
punctuation.
1. Jack jumped into the river to rescue the little girl. He wasn’t a good swimmer.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. He was still hungry. He ate a large dinner.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. I had a lot of studying to do. I went to watch a film.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Ann’s father gave her some good advice. She didn’t follow it.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. His doctor warned him. He has continued to smoke nearly 20 cigarettes a day.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. A storm was coming. The two climbers continued to climb up the mountain.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. The villagers had repeated crop failures due to drought. They refused to leave their traditional
homeland.
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. I finished copying down my lesson notes. The teacher talked too fast.
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Make meaningful sentences with clauses of result from the cues in the two columns. The first
sentence has been done for you as an example.
0. She worked hard. A. You could hear it from miles away.
1. It was a beautiful day. B. You would think it was her native language.
 2. I was tired. C. We spent the whole day indoors.
3. We had a good time on holiday. D. She made herself ill.
4. She speaks English well. E. I couldn’t keep my eyes open.
5. I’ve got a lot of things to do. F. I didn’t eat anything for the rest of the day.
6. The music was loud. G. We decided to go to the beach.
7. I had a big breakfast. H. I don’t know where to begin.
8. It was horrible weather. I. We didn’t want to come home.
0. She worked so hard that she made herself ill.
1. It was ___________________________________________________________________________.
2. I was ____________________________________________________________________________.
3. ________________________________________________________________________________.
4. ________________________________________________________________________________.
5. ________________________________________________________________________________.
6. ________________________________________________________________________________.
7. ________________________________________________________________________________.
8. ________________________________________________________________________________.
V. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
1. __________ the sky was grey and cloudy, we went to the beach.
A. However B. Because C. Although D. So
2. I turned on the fan __________ the room was hot
A. because B. although C. though D. so
3. Carol arrived at the party __________ I asked her not to be there.
A. even though B. however C. because D. but
4. __________ I have a pain with my fingers, I can’t type the presentation by myself.
A. And B. But C. Although D. Because
5. It looks like that they are going to succeed __________ they have many difficulties.
A. because B. although C. so D. but
6. __________ Ann is an honest person, I still wonder whether she is telling the truth about the
incident.
A. Because B. Although C. So D. However
7. __________ Mr. Nam has a new motorbike, he no longer takes the bus to work.
A. However B. But C. Although D. Because
8. I just lent Phong some money for lunch __________ he never gave me back my last loan.
A. because B. although C. so D. such
9. The task was __________ important that he had to do it immediately.
A. so B. such C. and D. but
10. It was __________ an important match that all the footballers had trained very hard.
A. so B. such C. because D. although
VI. Combine each pair of sentences using the words given in brackets.
1. The Smiths were able to cross the river. They had a boat. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. I put on my sunglasses. The sun was bright. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. The weather was good. I went fishing with my friends. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. We postponed our trip. The driving conditions were very bad. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Jim didn’t jog yesterday. His ankle was twisted. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. The elevator was broken. We had to walk up six flights of stairs. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. Please walk carefully. The walkway is slippery when wet. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. My lesson notes were incomplete. The teacher talked too fast. (because)
__________________________________________________________________________________
9. The wind was strong. It blew my hat off my head. (so... that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
10. Nam did a poor job. He lost his job. (such...that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
11. Small animals in the forest move about quickly. We can rarely catch sight of them. (so... that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
12. There are many leaves on a single tree. It is impossible to count them. (so...that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
13. I feel like I have little energy. I wonder if I’m getting ill. (so... that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
14. His car is in a terrible shape. He is going to get rid of it. (such...that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
15. Mr. Tan was exhausted after a hard-working day. He couldn’t eat dinner as soon as he arrived
home. (so...that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
16. Her manager suddenly gave her much work to do. She had to cancel her holiday. (so... that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
17. For a travel agent like Jane, the laptop is an essential piece of equipment. She uses it for nearly
everything in her work. (such...that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
18. My sister’s cooking is bad. My family members can’t eat the food she cooks. (so...that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
19. His joke was very funny. I couldn’t help laughing. (so... that)
__________________________________________________________________________________
20. The weather is very cold. We can see our breath from the mouth. (so...that)
__________________________________________________________________________________

D. Reading
• Reading about the future world of work
I. Read the text and do the following tasks.
Teens and Career Choices
Teenagers may take advantage of their young age to think about what is best for their future. To
pursue a career that teens really want, the desire should be considered first because there is no use
pushing something that doesn’t attract one’s taste. That desire can be achieved if teens have the right
resources such as reliable information from their teachers and parents. Advice from loved ones can
go far if teens follow it. In the end, it is the teens that have the final say on what they should do with
their lives.
It is common knowledge that the employment world is very competitive. In order to get a stable job,
one must have a good track record. The best way to achieve that is for teens to do well while in
school. It will be for teens to approach the career counsellors for important pieces of advice. The
importance of reliable advice is emphasized because it will create a big impact once the moment
comes when the teen decides on what to do with his or her life after school.
Teenagers must first know their strengths and weaknesses. This includes physical and mental abilities.
Knowing one’s abilities is very crucial, especially in entry level positions because the teenager will
know where to go and when to start work.
The best advice for teens at this point is to study well. Studying well doesn’t mean locking themselves
in the library while poring at volumes after volumes of books. To study well means finding the
resources that can enhance their strengths and diminish their weaknesses. For example, if the
teenager has the ability for maths, then it is advisable to join a Math Club where he or she can
interact with those who are skillful with the subject as well. This act promotes strengthening of the
skills in maths, and at the same time, developing social skills. It really pays to know someone. Who
knows, a fellow Math Club member could be the future manager of a big company.
(Source: Internet}
Task 1. Find evidence for the following statements. Quote from the text.
1. Parents play an important role in the future career choice of their children.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Good grades in school are very important because they will help you get a successful job in the
future.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Getting good grades in school does not mean working too hard.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Task 2. Match the following underlined words from the text to their meanings.
1. pursue _____ A. honest
2. reliable _____ B. succeed in getting something
3. rack record _____ C. studying
4. achieve _____ D. past performance
5. impact _____ E. effect
6. strengths _____ F. forces
7. poring _____ G. follow
Task 3. Say what / who the words in bold in the text refer to.
1. their ________________________________________________________
2. it ________________________________________________________
3. that ________________________________________________________
4. his ________________________________________________________
5. This ________________________________________________________
6. themselves ________________________________________________________
II. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
At what age can you be an artist?
 It’s 1994, Art students at George Primary School in Scottish Highland are very lucky. They’ve
got a well-known artist, Rob Fairley, there to help them learn. Rob wants to stay but there’s no
money to pay him. What do his students do? They make money by taking and selling photos.
Rob can’t believe it and he stays, but he doesn’t take their money. Instead, he helps them
learn for free.
 For five years, Rob helps the students with their art, but not by just “teaching” them. He helps
them find their own way to create and to think for themselves. Does this work? Well, soon
people start to buy the students’ art. The students make money, and they get their own studio
room in the school - Room 13.
 Now it’s the year 2000. Room 13 is a full-time art studio. Imagine: a successful art studio that
young children own! The Managing Director is ten years old! The students win some big prizes
and there is a TV show about them. A rich man called Rod Wright sees the show. He loves the
idea and wants to help the students share it with the rest of the world.
 Today there are 80 Room 13s all over the world, from Nepal to South Africa. In each one, there
is an adult artist helping the students, but the students make their own art and run their own
business. Thanks to Room 13, there are thousands of very special young artists.
(Adapted from Read to Achieve)
Task 1. Choose the correct answers.
1. What is the correct text type?
a. an advertisement for Room 13 art
b. a magazine article about Room 13
c. a text from a guidebook about Scotland
2. What is the main idea of the text?
a. Art is a very important school subject.
b. You can make money from doing art.
c. Young people can be great artists.
d. “Real” artists are always adults.
3. Look at the words, and choose the correct meanings,
create a. study b. colour things c. make something
new
successful a. something that does well b. something important c. something new
run a. find b. sell c. have
Task 2. Match the paragraphs 1-4 to the headings A-D.
A. A “little” idea travels around the world ______________
B. Working for love not for money ______________
C. A new way of teaching art ______________
D. From school project to real business ______________
III. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
Cash in hand!
These days in the USA, around 60% of all college students have a part-time job to help pay for college,
or simply to earn some spending money. Students work in the evenings and at weekends. The
average wage is $15 per hour.
All kind of jobs ...
Jobs such as waiting tables, making deliveries, cashier work, and working in customer service are
always very popular. There are also some jobs available on college campuses, such as a research
assistant or a teaching assistant.
Camp Counselors
During the summer holiday, a lot of college students choose to work at summer camps as camp
counselors. This way, they can spend time outdoors, organize sports and other activities, and have
fun. There are many different kinds of camps, such as sports camps, language-learning camps, and
technology camps. Counselors get free room and board, and they also earn a good wage.
Internships
For students who know what they want to do when they graduate, a summer internship is ideal. The
job can often be low-paid or even unpaid, but it’s a great experience in the student’s chosen
profession. For example, medical students often work as lab assistants; and law students work as
clerks for a law firm. The company sometimes offers the intern a job after they graduate.
(Source: Internet)
Task 1. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NG (not given). Correct the false
statements.
1. Not many college students work to earn money.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. The most common type of work is waiting tables in a café or restaurant.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Camp counselors pay for their food and accommodations out of their wages.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Being a camp counselor can help students get a job after they graduate.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Interns usually earn a low wage.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Task 2. Match the words in bold to their synonyms.
1. perfect ______________
2. usual ______________
3. finish your degree ______________
4. food and accommodation ______________
5. helper ______________
IV. Read the extracts from three people, and decide whether the following statements are true (T),
or false (F). Correct the false statements.
Amelia: I’d really like to do the course in performing arts, because I’m very interested in dance, but I
have to think about my career. I work as a fashion designer and will need to use a computer to design
clothes, so I’m going to do the Information Technology course. I can study dance and photography in
my free time.
Jack: I really like the idea of the performing arts course. I’m in a rock band and I love drama and
music, but my parents don’t like that idea at all, they don’t think it’s very useful for my career. They
want me to do the Information Technology course, but I already know a lot about computers and 1
don’t want to spend my life working with computers. So I’ve decided to do the leisure and tourism
course because traveling is quite interesting, and it makes Mum and Dad happy because it’s a “real
job”!
Susan: 1 really liked the idea of the sports studies course - it looks great - working with people and
doing something I enjoy, but if I do the part-time course it’s just too long! Four years studying three
evenings a week - it’s too much. I look at the childcare course too, but it’s working with really small
children, and I prefer older ones. So in the end, I didn’t choose any of these courses, I’m going to look
for another sports studies course at a different college, because I want to try to find something
shorter.
(Adapted from Achievers)
Statements T F
1. The work of a fashion designer requires computer skills.
______________________________________________________________________
2. Amelia will become a dancer.
______________________________________________________________________
3. Jack will follow the Information Technology course.
______________________________________________________________________
4. Jack’s parents make him follow the career in the leisure and tourism.
______________________________________________________________________
5. Susan finally takes a sports studies course.
______________________________________________________________________
6. Susan is interested in small children because she considers the childcare course.
______________________________________________________________________
7. Amelia and Jack take the Information Technology course.
______________________________________________________________________
8. None of them can follow their first choice of courses.
 ______________________________________________________________________
V. Match the headings (A-H) with each paragraph. Write the answer in each blank.
A. Good Problem-Solving Skills
B. Good Business Sense
C. Strong Drawing and Drafting Skills
D. Ability to Work Together
E. Good Communication Skills
F. Excellent Sense of Design
G. Passion for the Work
H. Ability to Visualize a Project
The Most Common Qualities of An Architect
1. _________________________________________________________________________________
Good design includes not only the external beauty of a building, but also the interior.
2. _________________________________________________________________________________
It is one of the main tasks that architects perform: producing floor plans. Architects should be able to
do that manually on paper and also via software such as CAD or Photoshop.
3. _________________________________________________________________________________
Good architects have a natural feeling for space and dimensions and are able to see structures in their
mind’s eye before the project has even started.
4. _________________________________________________________________________________
Proficient architects should have excellent verbal and written communication skills so that they can
successfully express their ideas to clients and contractors.
5. _________________________________________________________________________________
Architects are constantly dealing with challenges that arise during the course of a project. They must
know how to resolve successfully whatever comes in their way.
6. _________________________________________________________________________________
Architects do not work alone; they are continually interacting with clients, contractors, and other
architects. They must know how to operate within a team.
7. _________________________________________________________________________________
Because architects must handle so much responsibility, it is essential that they have a true passion for
their work.
8. _________________________________________________________________________________
Architects should be able to make financially clever decisions and their designs don’t break the bank.
VI. Read the passage and do the tasks that follow.
Landing Your Dream Position
Finding a position that pays well and offers job satisfaction can be extremely difficult. To give yourself
the best chance of success, you need to be as well-prepared as possible. Here are a few tips from
career adviser Nicola Cornell.
A. Killer Résumé
This is the starting point. You want your resume to stand out from the crowd. This doesn’t mean using
a fancy font or bright colours to make it more eye-catching than the rest. Keep it short and sweet -
ideally no more than a page - and ensure there are no typing mistakes. The most important thing is to
tailor your resume to each specific position you apply for.
B. Clever Cover
You will usually be expected to send a cover letter or e-mail with your resume. This is your chance to
blow your own trumpet. However, don’t just give them your life story. The least impressive personal
statements are lists of events, achievements, and qualifications. Your resume should take care of that.
Instead, let them know who you are, what makes you special, and why they should hire you.
C. Do Your Homework
There is nothing worse than a candidate who steps into an interview with no idea about the company
or position he or she is going to apply for. Arm yourself with facts and figures and all the vital
information.
D. Dress for Success
Regardless of the kind of job you are interviewed for, you should always look your best. Formal office
clothes are the way to create a good first impression.
E. Ask Questions
Toward the end of an interview, you will usually be asked if you have any questions. Never say no!
This makes you look disinterested or even overconfident.
Follow the above advice and you should be well on the way to securing a perfect position. Good luck!
(Adapted from Active)
Task 1. Match the pieces of advice in each paragraph to 1-10 below. Write the answer in each blank.
Which paragraph ...
1. contains advice about appearance? _________________
2. warns you about appearing too sure of yourself? _________________
3. tells you to be short and clear? _________________
4. uses a musical idiom? _________________
5. says you shouldn’t just give lots of details? _________________
6. encourages you to do research? _________________
7. advises you to change the information you provide depending on the job you are applying for?
_________________
8. warns you not to make spelling mistakes? _________________
9. implies that you should not dress casually? _________________
10. claims that an unprepared candidate is the worst thing? _________________
Task 2. Finds words/ phrases in the passage to match these definitions.
1. pieces of advice: _________________
2. a letter of application: _________________
3. praise your own achievements: _________________
4. a person who is applying for a job: _________________
5. provide yourself with knowledge to complete a task: _________________
VII. Read the adverts, and complete them with the sentences below. The teenagers want to earn
some money. Choose the best job from the adverts for them.
A. You have to go out whatever the weather
B. You must enjoy speaking on the phone
C. You don’t have to do any housework
D. You must be friendly and presentable
SITUATION VACANT
Shop Assistant Wanted
A teenage boy or girl (must be over 16) to work on Saturdays in a busy coffee shop. Duties include
making sandwiches and serving customers. 1 _________________. Long hair must be in a ponytail at
all times. Uniform provided. £5.50 an hour.
Paper boy / girl
Teenager (over 14) needed to deliver newspapers for local newsagent’s. Six days a week. Must be at
the shop at 6.30 a.m. The paper round takes 30 minutes. You need to be fit, energetic and reliable. 2
_________________. £20 / week.
N.B.: You must have a bike.
Teatime girl
I am a mum with a schoolchild, a toddler, a baby and two dogs. I need someone (over 14) to help me
from 4.00 p.m. till 6 p.m. three days a week. You need to do fun things with the older kids like playing
games or drawing and painting.
3
_________________. Monday, Wednesday and Friday, but can change days if necessary. £5 / hour.
Call Centre Operator
We sell beauty products by mail order, and we need students (16 and over) to work in our call centre
4
at weekends. No experience is necessary, but good communication skills are essential.
____________. No personal calls while you’re working. Good rates of pay.
 Jack is very sporty and loves doing exercise. He’s happiest when he’s outside. He’s a very confident
person and gets on well with lots of different people, especially children.
Best job: _________________________________________________
 Linda is very creative and a brilliant artist. She’s got a good sense of humour and is fun to be with.
However, she’s very shy with people she’s never met before. She’s bad at cooking and hates cycling.
Best job: _________________________________________________
 Jack is a good communicator and he’s brilliant at selling things. However, he’s an untidy person and
never helps around the house. He finds it difficult to get up in the mornings. He’s allergic to dogs.
Best job: _________________________________________________
 Teresa is a talented netball player and plays on the school team. She has netball practice after
school twice a week. She’s very sociable and wants a job where she meets people. She enjoys
housework.
Best job: _________________________________________________
(Adapted from Studio}
VIII. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
Be the best!
Do you ever watch a film or your favourite sitcom and imagine being an actor? It’s a common dream
and thousands of people, from children to adults, apply to drama school every year. However, only a
small number of applicants actually win a place. The successful students are the ones who fill in an
outstanding application form and perform well in their audition. If you want to beat the other
applicants and get into a UK drama school, here are some useful tips.
 Help at your local amateur dramatics groups in your spare time. They always need volunteers to do
the make-up or help with the stage lighting. You might not be on the stage, but it’ll give you
experience behind the scenes in a theatre.
 You can learn techniques from professional actors, so go to the theatre as often as possible. You
may have a good theatre nearby, but try and go to different ones. If you go to London, you’ll see a
huge variety of plays in the West End. Look out for special offers for students and young people. It’ll
save money.
 Read lots of plays and practise learning lines and reciting them. They may ask you about your
favourite play in the audition, so make sure you can talk about that. You should read books about
theatre, film, and TV too. Then you’ll know how the industry works.
(Source: Internet)
Task 1. Who is the text for?
A. For those who want to interview actors
B. For those who want to write plays
C. For those who want to become actors
D. For those who want to go to the theatre
Task 2. Read the text again, and find the correct words to complete the sentences.
1. You go to a(n) _________________ to learn how to act.
2. You fill in a(n) _________________ to apply for something, for example a job.
3. _________________ are small pieces of advice.
4. _________________ help to produce plays as a hobby, not as a job.
5. The lights used during a play are called _________________.
6. Actors performed on the _________________ in a theatre.
7. The _________________ is the area in London that is famous for its theatres.
Task 3. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false). Correct the false statements.
1. Only young people can go to drama school in the UK.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. It isn’t easy to get a place at drama school.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Working in amateur dramatics will help your application.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. It’s best to go to a variety of theatres.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Everyone pays the same price for theatre tickets.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. You definitely have to talk about your favourite play at an audition.
___________________________________________________________________________________
IX. What career do you want to have? Do the test to find out what type of career suits you the best.
Do you agree with your result? Why / Why not? Tell the class.
What’s the job for you?
One of the keys to a happy life is enjoying the job you do. That’s why finding the right job is very
important. Take this test to help you find a career that best suits your skills and interests.
1. Which item would describe yourself as?
A. A computer - I am very helpful and useful.
B. A blanket - I comfort people.
C. A TV -1 have many different moods.
2. Which of these activities do you enjoy the most?
A. fixing and building
B. talking and listening
C. painting and drawing
3. How do you prefer to work?
A. I like to be part of a team.
B. I prefer to work by myself.
C. I’m fine either on a team or alone.
4. How do you usually solve a problem?
A. I look for a practical solution.
B. I try to find a solution everyone agrees on.
C. I often think of a simple solution no one else thought of.
5. Which colour describes your personality best?
A. Green - I am relaxed and calm.
B. Yellow - I make people happy.
C. Red - I am spontaneous.
Mostly As: You are realistic, down-to-earth person who likes to work with materials. You would make
a good engineer, electrician, or surgeon.
Mostly Bs: You are a caring and helpful person who likes to work with people. You would be a good
nurse, social worker, or psychologist.
Mostly Cs: You are an artistic and creative person who is also good at solving problems. You like
coming up with new ideas, and you would be a good architect, film director, or interior designer.

E. Speaking
• Talking about the job you want to do in the future
I. Complete the conversation with the phrases given below. Then practise it with a partner. There is
one extra phrase that you do not need.
A. especially necessary to keep up with these changes
B. be tested by other programmers to assure the result
C. travel anywhere and work anywhere he wants if he has a laptop and the Internet
connection
D. practise my soft skills, like communication skills, presentation skills, and negotiation skills
E. an e-commerce business owner not only needs a website, but they need someone to collect
data
F. decides if my software is competitive or not
G. writing software for other companies who need software to solve some problems in the
company’s operation
Jack: What job do you think you’ll do in the future?
Phong: I want to be a freelance computer programmer.
Jack: Interesting! Why do you like this job?
Phong: IT is my favourite subject at school. I’m also good at Maths. A freelance computer programmer
can 1 _________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Jack: What does the job involve?
2
Phong: The job involves
_______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Jack: What skills do you need for the job?
Phong: To be suitable for the job, first of all, 1 need to have teamwork skills because when a
3
programme is written, it has to
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________. More than that, since computer
4
science changed quickly every year, self-study is
___________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Lastly, creativity is vital because it 5 ________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Jack: Why do you think this job is perfect for you?
Phong: I think this job is perfect for me because I can help make the lives of my customers easier. Plus,
thanks to the job, I can 6. And the last reason is the most attractive one is that this job
nowadays is really well-paid. I’ve never met any programmers with a low income, for sure.
Jack: I hope you’ll be a successful computer programmer some day.
Phong: Thank you, Jack.
• Everyday English: Expressing hope and responding
II. Complete the sentences expressing hope with the phrases given below.
hopes the test will hope that they will finish hopes he will take
hope I pass hopes you call hopes that I meet
1. She _____________________________ her soon.
2. He _____________________________ his money soon from, the. manager.
3. She _____________________________ my new friends soon.
4. My father _____________________________ not be difficult for me.
5. I _____________________________ the test next Tuesday.
6. They _____________________________ the project before September.
III. Match the situations to the expressions showing hope and write the answers in the blanks.
1. Hoa’s family is going on holiday to Nha Trang. _______ A. Good luck.
2. Ann is going to the casting of a new film. _______ B. Enjoy the story.
3. Jack has got an “Ar” for the English test. _______ C. Congratulations!
4. Lan and her friends will have a party this Saturday _______ D. Enjoy the film.
 evening.

5. Phong is at the cinema. He wants to see the new _______ E. Have a nice trip.
film.
6. Mi is reading a new novel. _______ F. Have a wonderful weekend.
IV. Read the situations or conversations and choose the correct answer expressing hope.
1. You go and visit a friend who is ill in hospital. At the end of your visit, you say to him:
You: __________________________________________________
A. Take care of yourself!
B. What’s wrong with you?
C. Get well soon.
D. How are you getting on?
2. Ann: Are you free this evening? Let’s go to Lan’s house.
Hoa: I’m sorry, I can’t. I must help my mother to sew a dress.
Ann: Is your mother a dressmaker?
Hoa: Yes. I always help her.
Ann: I’m sure that you will be a good dressmaker later.
Hoa: __________________________________________________
A. I hope so. B. Who says so? C. Not at all. D. Really?
3. Jack meets Minh on his way home from school.
Jack: Hi, Minh. Is that right that you’ll take part in the school performance?
Minh: That’s right.
Jack: ________________ you’ll be successful.
Minh: Thanks.
A. I doubt B. I know C. I mind D. I hope
4. Ann: I’m going to visit Cat Tien National Park with my family next week.
Lan: That’s good. __________________________________________________
A. I hope you’ll have a good time.
B. You must have a lot of money.
C. That’s not exciting.
D. I wish you the best.
5. Duong: It’s cloudy. Do you think it’s going to rain?
Jack: _____________________________________. We’re going to watch a football match, aren’t we?
A. I hope not. B. I’m not sure. C. I don’t believe it. D. I don’t think so.
6. Lan: Have you visited the Imperial Citadel of Thang Long? It’s the UNESCO Heritage Site.
Ann: No, I haven’t, but __________________________________________________.
A. I think it’ll not interesting at all
B. you can take me to that place
C. I hope to be able to do it next week
D. I’ll go with you to that place
7. Sister: Is Dad coming home today?
Brother: __________________________________________________
A. I don’t know. Sorry for that.
B. I expect he’ll come back soon.
C. Do you know exactly when he comes back home?
D. I don’t think so. He’s coming home soon.

F. Writing
• Writing an email about your future favourite job
Write an email to your friend telling him / her about your future dream job, using the cues given
below.
- an aeronautic engineer: serve at a well-known airline company after my graduation
- career: all about dealing with the planes and their maintenance; job: involve several
responsibilities
- the engineer: responsible for checking a plane before and after a flight, also plays the role of
supervising any of the repairing activities of an airplane
- to maintain the plane, the engineer: take part in flight tests, analyse the oil pressure,
maximum altitude limit for the plane and more other matters
- qualities: decision-making skills, the skill at analysing the operation of a plane, and problem-
solving skills to develop solutions during the process of designing and building an airplane
- communication: essential for aeronautic engineers, explain the ideas clearly, listen actively,
and give feedback
- collaboration: also important for aeronautic engineers to work with other engineers as well as
customers, and suppliers, have a duty to hold the highest standards of quality, safety and
reliability in your work
Dear ________________,
It’s nice to hear from you again. Let me tell you about my career choice.
Everyone has a dream job in future, and I also have one. I have had a dream job for a long time. It is
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Write to me soon,
Best wishes
 TEST 1 (UNIT 12)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. assembly B. orientation C. bartender D. repetitive
2. A. decisive B. design C. situation D. surprise
3. A. hands-on B. fashion C. challenging D. software
4. A. degree B. technology C. surgeon D. challenging
5. A. passion B. decisive C. success D. skills
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Most teachers regard their profession as a ______________, not just a job.
A. mission B. vocation C. pursuit D. business
7. Readers gain a real ______________ of what life was like in the camp.
A. judgment B. ability C. capacity D. sense
8. She began her ______________ career at a school in a Mekong Delta province.
A. teaching B. schooling C. direction D. instruction
9. The meeting will end with a question and answer ______________.
A. gathering B. assembly C. session D. section
10. She has some ______________ in dealing with children with emotional problems.
A. instruction B. schooling C. training D. education
11. That artist can’t expect to ______________ a living from his painting career.
A. earn B. obtain C. perform D. gather
12. A lot of people tell you to follow your ______________, follow your dreams, or do what makes you
happy.
A. excitement B. desire C. passion D. wish
13. ______________ must know a wide range of drink recipes and be able to mix drinks quickly.
A. Barmen B. Innkeepers C. Barmaids D. Bartenders
14. A job ______________ is a written explanation that outlines the essential responsibilities and
requirements for a vacant position.
A. evaluation B. description C. satisfaction D. security
15. This is the ______________ week for all the new students at this school.
A. introduction B. presentation C. orientation D. familiarization
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
communication choice advantages path
living orientation experience opportunities
16
Choosing the right career can be difficult, but having a career ______________ will help you
17
get a job. But with a little hard work and some planning, you can set yourself on a(n)
18
______________ to a successful career that can help you earn a(n) ______________. It is very easy
to turn your hobbies into a future career. Many hobbies lead to real world needs and positions.
Consider what you like to do and how that might fit into a career. You may want to work part-time in
19
order to get more ______________ in your desired career. For example, if you like drawing or art,
consider becoming a graphic designer.
Academic subjects at school transfer well into future careers but may require more schooling
20
than other types of careers. The issue is that you have to be willing to work for your
______________. For example, if you like chemistry class, you can look forward to a future career as a
lab technician or a pharmacist.
IV. Combine each pair of sentences using the words given in brackets.
21. She has a job. She doesn’t make enough money to support her two children. (although)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
22. I washed my hands. They looked dirty. (because)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
23. My mother made me take piano lessons when I was a child. I hated it at the time. (though)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
24. I couldn’t put my book down. I was really enjoying it. (because)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
25. The TV was very loud. I couldn’t hear what Jack was saying. (so...that)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Why are future skills important?
26
It is important to develop future skills because having them can ______________ your success and
27
help improve your career prospects. Here are some important skills to help you ______________ in
your career.
Employers will continue to look for employees that can find solutions to problems. Critical thinking
can help you put information into small groups to better understand data and make accurate
conclusions.
Active learning can help you develop skills and learn how to perform job tasks quickly. This is valuable
28 29
to employers ______________ it means you are adaptable so it may be easier to
______________ you.
30
Complex problem-solving is the ability to ______________ the information needed to analyse an
issue and plan to solve it. Businesses face complex problems every day, and it is important that they
hire employees who can 31 ______________ creative solutions.
32
______________ involves the ability to think of unique solutions and use your minds to see
33
situations differently. It can be a useful ______________ for developing new ideas, increasing
efficiency and inventing solutions to complex problems.
34
Communication will continue to be an in-demand skill for future jobs. In the ______________,
communication is essential to cooperate with coworkers and 35 ______________ company goals.
(Source: Internet)
26. A. increase B. broaden C. extend D. widen
27. A. evolve B. continue C. grow D. flow
28. A. if B. even C. when D. because
29. A. prepare B. equip C. train D. practise
30. A. assemble B. gather C. reunite D. combine
31. A. promote B. deepen C. widen D. develop
32. A. Creativity B. Imagination C. Productivity D. Performance
33. A. gadget B. tool C. appliance D. equipment
34. A. workroom B. workstation C. workshop D. workplace
 35. A. conclude B. end C. achieve D. do
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Choosing a future career will be one of your biggest life decisions. While you don’t have to know
exactly what you are going to do for the rest of your life, it can be helpful to have a plan or even an
idea of your preferred career path.
It is normal to enjoy certain courses or subjects more than others. If there is a particular subject that
you really enjoy, find out what career it could lead to. New jobs are being created every day, so you
should spend some time researching available careers. You might be surprised by the range of
positions in your area of interest. You can start by doing a quick Google search of relevant industries
or using any other search engine.
There are some great online tools that can help you narrow down your career path. Some career
quizzes ask you some questions about your personality and work style. Using your answers to match
you to careers, the tool then sends you a detailed, personalized report on the careers that might best
suit your strengths and qualities.
When you choose a career, you are also choosing a lifestyle. Some jobs come with long working
hours, while others come with location requirements. Different jobs also offer different rates of pay. It
is a good idea to think about whether your dream career suits your lifestyle expectations. Some
people don’t mind working long hours, but for others, flexible working hours are more important than
a high salary.
If you are thinking about pursuing a certain career, speaking to someone who currently works in that
position can help you to make your decision. Professionals can break down the positives and
negatives of the job, explain how they initially got into the role, and give you a better understanding
of the reality of the career.
(Source: Internet)
36. It is normal to find that ______________.
A. the school subject you enjoy will not lead to your future job
B. people spend a lot of time searching information for study
C. new jobs may be created every day in your area of interest
D. it is not necessary to make a plan of your career path
37. Some career quizzes can offer you some suggestions about your future careers by
______________.
A. asking your characters and work orientation
B. choosing the most popular and well-paid jobs
C. asking your life expectations
D. doing a quick Google search of relevant industries
38. You should choose a career that ______________.
A. can help you choose your own lifestyle
B. offers you well-paid salaries, but not long working hours
C. satisfies your lifestyle expectations
D. used to be your dream career
39. All of the following are benefits of speaking to an expert in your dream career EXCEPT
__________.
A. helping you make your own decision
B. telling you the advantages and disadvantages of the job
C. understanding the real conditions in your future career
D. explaining how to get to the top position in the company
40. The phrase “break down” in the last paragraph is closest in meaning to ______________.
A. stop working B. analyze C. train D. enter
VII. Complete the conversation with the phrases given below. Then practise it with a partner. There
is one extra phrase that you do not need.
A. communicate effectively with other people to develop their business
B. travel across the world, and make a career out of their passion
C. go out to public places more often to see how people dress
D. creating new things using my observation skills
E. have a creative mind to make new patterns, styles and shapes
F. use computer-assisted art programmes to help in the design process
Hoa: What job do you think you’ll do in the future?
Jack: I want to be a fashion designer.
Hoa: Fantastic! Why do you like this job?
41
Jack: I have a passion for
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
 42
I read a lot of fashion magazines, watch some fashion shows on social media and
__________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Hoa: What skills do you need for the job?
43
Jack: In this job I will have to design new clothing styles, so I need to
_________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Besides that, a fashion designer may sketch, draw, and paint their initial designs before sewing
44
them. Then, designers work with a lot of people, so they must
_________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Hoa: What do you expect from this job?
Jack: Working in the fashion industry can provide an exciting lifestyle. Many fashion designers work
with a wide variety of people, 45 ___________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Hoa: I think you can make your dream come true.
Jack: Thank you, Hoa.
VIII. Write sentences to tell your friend about your future favourite job, using the cues given below.
Your favourite job: a flight attendant
46. The job involves: help passengers when they are flying, provide excellent customer service and
are also responsible for keeping all the passengers comfortable and safe
47. Skills needed: crucial to have strong communication skills because they explain information to
passengers, like how to use life-saving devices, and communicate with other crew members
48. vital that a flight attendant is capable of responding effectively to emergencies, and providing
care to passengers facing medical issues in the cabin
49. works with others to come to the best possible solution (when unexpected issues happen
during a flight)
50. Personal qualities: have a passion for air travel, working with people and customer service;
have the ability to work under pressure, be friendly, patient, and remain calm in stressful
situations, especially in an emergency
Dear Jack,
It’s nice to hear from you again. Let me tell you about the job I would like to do in the future. My
future job is a flight attendant.
46. The job of a flight attendant is basically to help
___________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Write to me soon,
Best wishes
 TEST 2 (UNIT 12)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. agriculture B. fabric C. mechanic D. career
2. A. demanding B. theoretical C. concession D. engineer
3. A. inquiring B. life-long C. online D. polite
4. A. patient B. coordination C. vocational D. future
5. A. style B. course C. designer D. stress
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Formal learning is not a _____________ process, but it produces outcomes in an amount of time.
A. lifesaving B. lifegiving C. long-life D. life-long
7. Nearly 70 percent of workers say the biggest opportunity of automation lies in reducing time
wasted on _____________ work.
A. repeated B. repetitive C. redone D. rehearing
8. The book is not very _____________ about local customs.
A. communicative B. productive C. informative D. formative
9. People whose skills are practical rather than _____________ can become good mechanics.
A. learned B. academic C. educational D. informal
10. His present job doesn’t stretch him, so he is looking for something more _____________.
A. stressful B. troublesome C. painful D. demanding
11. Visitors should use reputable travel agencies with _____________ guides, and avoid camping
alone.
A. knowledgeable B. educational C. understandable D. recognizable
12. _____________ courses still tend to be taken mainly by working-class students.
A. Educational B. Occupational C. Vocational D. Professional
13. They were engaged in a _____________ struggle to get independence for their country.
A. life-giving B. life-saving C. life-and-death D. true-to-life
14. Informal learning is a concept that takes place outside of a standard _____________ learning
environment, such as a university, school, or college.
A. correct B. formal C. directed D. distant
15. Careers in _____________ fields usually involve imagination and original thinking particularly
through the creation of original work in the arts and media.
A. creative B. decorative C. dramatic D. productive
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
communicate succeed take assess
consider benefit offer earn
In order to 16 _____________ skills for a future career, you think about the subjects you are good at in
school. Choosing a career based on something you are skilled at can help you excel in your job and
provide yourself a secure future.
If you are particularly good at certain skills, such as fixing things or making things, this can provide you
with a great future career. Schooling may or may not be necessary, but skilled labour is often in
demand, and you will find it fairly easy to find work. For example, carpentry, auto repair, construction
17
and electrical work all _____________ from people who are good at fixing things or working with
their hands. These also tend to be stable, well- paid jobs.
If your skills lie more in helping and communicating with other people, there are jobs for you as well.
People who 18 _____________ and interact with others well can easily get careers as social workers or
19
in marketing and similar business positions. If you are more the type to _____________ care of
others, 20 _____________ nursing or work as an administrative assistant or office manager.
Sometimes it is hard for us to see the areas in life where we excel. You can ask your friends and family
what they think you would be good at. Their ideas might surprise you.
IV. Combine each pair of sentences using the words given in brackets.
21. Jane is a good pianist. I’m surprised she didn’t go into music professionally. (such...that)
___________________________________________________________________________________
22. The food was very hot. It burned my tongue. (so...that)
___________________________________________________________________________________
23. I was very sleepy. 1 finished all of my homework. (although)
___________________________________________________________________________________
24. Her eyes were red. She had been swimming in a chlorinated pool. (because)
___________________________________________________________________________________
25. Daisy didn’t know how to swim. She jumped into the swimming pool. (though)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Do you know that parents are the greatest influence in their teens’ career choices? As a
parent, you play a(n) 26 _____________ role in helping your teens succeed. In fact, you are their head
coach.
27
Coaching is about helping your teens realize their ideas in goals and _____________
decisions. A coach is a guide, a helper, a supporter, and a partner. Becoming a career coach means
28
helping your teens find their passions and explore their interests, exploring career _____________
with them, and helping teens set challenging but 29 _____________ career goals.
The world of work has changed a lot in the past few decades. As your teens’ coach, you will
need to stay up to date on the changing career landscape. You may need to research new workplace
30
_____________, find out about emerging careers, and discover which industries are expected to
31
have the greatest _____________ for workers. For example, artificial intelligence and automation
32
will _____________ some jobs and create others. Career experts advise teenagers to develop
“future-proof” skills that will still be in demand as processes are automated.
Your teens may be facing some concerns and challenges. For example, they may fear that they may
33
not find satisfying work, and worry that making the wrong choice now will _____________ them for
34
a long time. You should make career planning an _____________ conversation. You can bring
35
discussions about interests and career choices _____________ the kitchen table, or get involved in
an activity with your teens, for example, consider volunteering together.
(Source: Internet)
26. A. basic B. official C. standard D. key
27. A. do B. make C. get D. bring
28. A. options B. rights C. decisions D. selections
29. A. reasonable B. available C. achievable D. reliable
30. A. ambitions B. trends C. courses D. aims
31. A. order B. pursuit C. demand D. requirement
32. A. cut B. dispose C. erase D. eliminate
33. A. affect B. determine C. regulate D. motivate
 34. A. open-ended B. advancing C. ongoing D. endless
35. A. to B. at C. in D. on
V. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Careers of the Future
How do you prepare for a career that won’t be possible in another 20 or 30 years? For the future of
work, it is predicted that automation might lead to the loss of 85 million jobs around the world in the
next five years. Automation is when jobs are done by robots, machines, or computers instead of by
people. Technology defines the world around US. Artificial intelligence or Al is quickly taking over
decision-making for healthcare, finances and pretty much everything. While that sounds like bad news
for humans, it is also predicted that 97 million jobs related to automation and technology could be
created during the same period of time. So some people will lose their jobs, but more jobs will be
available overall. Workers will need training and help to prepare for those new jobs. For example,
doctors who have access to Al might be able to help more patients because they can get the research
and information they need faster. In factories, the most dangerous and repetitive work can be done
by robots, lowering the risk of injury to workers.
There is one thing that everyone seems to agree on: Workers are always going to keep learning and
increasing their skills. In some industries, robots have already taken over jobs that humans did for
decades. Workers in those industries have needed to learn new skills, sometimes for jobs in entirely
new and different fields. Retraining is a big change for workers. But people in just about every
industry are already making changes and adapting to technology.
You can’t certainly predict what careers will be available in the future, but you can still prepare for
them. By developing STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics) skills, trying out new
things, and becoming a strong leader and thinker, teenagers will certainly take advantage of
technology to thrive in the future world of work.
(Source: Internet)
36. In employment, automation will _____________.
A. replace all workers by robots
B. remove old jobs and create new jobs
C. be controlled by robots
D. be possible in another 20 or 30 years
37. Artificial intelligence or AI will _____________.
A. decide everything in most fields
B. make decisions for doctors or bank directors
C. significant influence in most fields
D. change technology completely
38. In order to keep a job, workers will have to do all of the following things EXCEPT _____________.
A. to move to new and different fields sometimes
B. to take over jobs that robots did
C. to learn new knowledge and skills
D. to adapt to changes in technology
39. In order to thrive in the future world of work, teenagers should have all of the following skills
EXCEPT _____________.
A. creativity B. leadership C. critical thinking D. emotion intelligence
40. The word “defines” in paragraph 1 is closest in meaning to _____________.
A. gives the meaning B. distinguishes or encloses
C. shows or describes D. fixes or settles
VII. Complete the conversation with the sentences given below. Then practise it with a partner.
There is one extra sentence that you do not need.
A. Being a wildlife conservationist would allow me to combine my love for nature, my desire to
make a difference, and my dedication to protecting the environment.
B. I feel a deep connection with nature and a responsibility to protect it for future generations.
C. I was interested in the work of the conservationists who dedicate their lives to protecting
and preserving endangered species and their habitats.
D. This job also demands excellent fieldwork and research skills.
E. Being a wildlife conservationist requires a lot of skills.
F. I’ll have the opportunity to make a positive impact on our planet’s biodiversity.
Mai: What job do you think you’ll do in the future?
Nick: I want to be a wildlife conservationist.
Mai: Why did you choose it as your future job, Nick?
Nick: I first came across this job while watching a documentary about wildlife and conservation
efforts. 41 _____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Mai: What skills do you need for the job?
42
Nick: ______________________________________________________________________.
First, you need to have a strong understanding of ecology and conservation methods, as well
43
as knowledge about the specific species you’re working with.
____________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
Mai: What do you expect from this job?
44
Nick: ___________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________.
45
Besides that, this job offers the chance for personal growth and continuous learning.
_______
____________________________________________________________________________.
Mai: I think you can make your dream come true.
Nick: Thank you, Mai.
VIII. Write sentences to tell your friend about your future favourite job, using the cues given below.
Your favourite job: a doctor
46. The job involves: examine patients and diagnose diseases, determine the type and duration of
the treatment
47. part of a doctor's duties - preventive examinations and measures
48. Education: the study of human medicine (compulsory), the length of university studies: 12
semesters in six years
49. Skills: technical skills to prescribe medicines correctly or offer suitable treatments; problem-
solving skills to assess symptoms, diagnose conditions and develop a treatment; strong
communication skills help doctors understand their patients’ symptoms, or talk with nurses
about the proper care
50. Personal qualities: sympathetic, flexible and attentive; long working hours - be patient, and
always maintain self-confidence and carefulness
Dear Nick,
It’s nice to hear from you again. Let me tell you about the job I would like to do in the future. My
future job is a doctor.
46. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. ________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Write to me soon,
Best wishes
 REVIEW 4 (UNITS 10-11-12)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. affect B. appreciate C. aluminum D. portable
2. A. rubber B. suck C. hunt D. surgeon
3. A. habitat B. orbit C. virtual D. fabric
4. A. observe B. reserve C. hands-on D. plastic
5. A. fascinating B. appreciate C. pesticide D. appliances
II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Each ______________ includes living things, non-living things, and the surrounding environment.
A. territory B. neighbourhood C. habitat D. locality
7. In many countries, people have built nature ______________ to keep endangered plants and
animals safe.
A. reserves B. resources C. settings D. insurance
8. That tablet has two cameras to take photos, ______________ videos, and scan documents.
A. aim B. attack C. shoot D. fire
9. Nowadays we often use wireless keyboards because they are ______________.
A. transported B. moving C. transferable D. portable
10. Most smartphones today have a touchscreen which allows us to ______________, type, and
interact with apps and games easily.
A. drive B. navigate C. travel D. fly
11. What kind of career ______________ do you think is most suitable for you when you’ve just
graduated from college?
A. way B. ladder C. path D. break
12.We need to get a good job to ______________ a decent living.
A. spend B. earn C. do D. bring
13. I hope they take her age into ______________ when they judge her work.
A. account B. note C. thinking D. attention
14. The computer programme is ______________ to the needs of individual users.
A. available B. accessible C. adaptable D. reasonable
15. Interesting movements have been launched to attract the ______________ of a large number of
youths.
A. participate B. participation C. participant D. participating
III. Fill in each blank in the passage with the correct word given below. There are some extra words
that you do not need.
Civil engineers Translators Architects Human resource officers
Interpreters Midwives Travel agents Nurses
16. ______________________ are responsible for helping members of the public select and organise
their ideal holiday on a limited budget.
17. ______________________ convert speech in one language to another.
18. ______________________ are responsible for hiring, developing and looking after employees.
19. ______________________ plan and design construction and maintenance of building structures
and facilities, such as roads, railways, airports, bridges, etc.
20. ______________________ deliver babies and provide advice, care and support to women, and
their babies.
IV. Choose the underlined part among A, B, C or D that needs correcting.
21. He is a so smart boy that you stand no chances of winning against him.
A. a so smart B. stand C. of winning D. against
22. The novel was such interesting that I read it from the beginning to the end for 4 hours.
A. such B. read it C. the beginning D. for
23. The stars are such far away that they can’t be seen without a telescope.
A. such B. they C. be seen D. without
24. In recent years, educated women have been marrying later, that means that they have fewer
years in which to produce offspring.
A. educated B. that C. in which D. produce
25. When you look in the mirror, you see your own face in the glass, that is a reflection of the true
image.
A. in the B. your own C. that is D. true
V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
26
A food chain refers to the _____________ of events in an ecosystem, where one living organism
27
eats another, and later that organism is consumed by another larger organism. The _____________
of nutrients and energy from one organism to another forms a food chain.
The food chain consists of three major parts: producers, consumers, and decomposers. The producers
in a food chain include a variety of plants. Producers are any plant or other organism that produce
their own nutrients through photosynthesis. Consumers are all organisms that are dependent on
plants or other organisms for 28 _____________. This is the largest 29 _____________ of the food web,
30
_____________ it contains almost all living organisms. It includes herbivores which are animals that
eat plants, carnivores which are animals that eat 31 _____________ animals, and scavengers which are
32
animals that eat dead animals. Decomposers are organisms that get _____________ from dead or
waste organic material. This is the last stage in the food chain.
33
_____________ food chains is vital, as they explain the relationships in an ecosystem. A food chain
34
shows us how every living organism is dependent on other organisms for _____________. The food
chain also explains the 35 of energy flows inside an ecosystem.
(Source: Internet)
26. A. direction B. order C. plan D. scale
27. A. movement B. flood C. tide D. flow
28. A. food B. meals C. meat D. refreshment
29. A. piece B. ingredient C. part D. share
30. A. as B. despite C. if D. that
31. A. another B. other C. others D. the other
32. A. pressure B. force C. energy D. power
33. A. Believing B. Discovering C. Thinking D. Understanding
34. A. survival B. continuation C. expansion D. endurance
35. A. track B. route C. railway D. path
VI. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question.
Growing up in Los Angeles, Vanessa Van Petten, at the age of sixteen, wrote a book for parents from
the teenage opinions: How to Stop Fighting and Make the Teenage years Easier. By the age of twenty-
one, she had created RadicalParenting.com, an online community for parents and teens. That’s
where, with two full-time employees, Van Petten’s 120 bloggers aged twelve to twenty answer
questions from parents. The site makes money through advertising and sponsored links to other
websites.
Vanessa’s advice:
Get advice and help: “Everyone said I was too young to start a company, but I used online resources,
read books, attended conferences and got advice from people I know. That’s how I learned about the
business so quickly.”
Reach new audiences: “Social media is a great way to get in touch with new users - that’s why we
went on sites for parents and personally emailed videos to big users in each community.”
Do something that works: “Most importantly, we offered advice that actually works. Parents are
increasingly spreading our articles by words of mouth. We want to build a brand that is not only
interesting but also life-changing.”
(Source: Internet)
36. How could Vanessa start her own company at an early age?
A. She got experience from her parents.
B. She wrote a book for parents.
C. She got experience from various sources.
D. She had several failures.
37. What new thing did Vanessa think she could offer parents?
A. More advice from teens
B. Useful advice about teens
C. Online advice from parents
D. A blog with her own advice
38. Why has she been successful?
A. She has built a well-known brand.
B. She knows her customers personally.
C. She employs a lot of people full-time.
D. Parents like her website’s advice.
39. What is Vanessa’s attitude toward creating the website?
A. Parents should go online more often in order to understand their children.
B. Parents should understand what their children are thinking.
C. Sending videos to parents is a good way to make parents understand their children.
D. It is the location for bloggers to express themselves.
40. What does the phrase “by words of mouth” mean?
A. in writing not in speech
B. feeling extremely nervous
C. by someone telling you
D. believing that what someone says is true
VII. Complete the conversation about a job interview, using the responses (A-G) given. There are
two extra ones.
A. This shows the interviewer that you have an interest in the company.
B. And always be yourself - you want them to hire the “real you”, not a fake version of you.
C. You should focus on your skills, abilities, and your interests.
D. Punctuality is very important when arriving at an interview.
E. Let the interviewer know why you are the best for the job.
F. Then dress up for the interview.
G. Make the answers brief and honest.
Jack: My brother’s going to have a job interview next week, and he feels so nervous. I don’t know
how to help him, sir.
Mr. Tan: I see. He has butterflies in his stomach. I’ll give some advice to get him prepared for his
interview.
Jack: It’s very kind of you. What should he do first?
Mr. Tan: First, don’t be late for the interview. 41 ____________________________________________
_______________________________________________________. This is the first impression that
the employer gets.
Jack: And if the applicant’s late, it gives the bad impression.
Mr. Tan: Right. 42 ____________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________. Showing up in jeans and a T-
shirt doesn’t give the best impression, even if that’s what you’ll be wearing in the job.
Jack: I’ve heard that the applicant must prepare well for the interview.
Mr. Tan: Sure. You should know the company you have applied to. 43 ___________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
Jack: I see. The questions the applicant has to answer are often difficult?
Mr. Tan: Not really, Nick. The most common questions are, “Tell me a little about yourself’, “Why do
44
you want to work for us?”, or “Why should we hire you?”
___________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
Jack: I think the first question is the most difficult. I low can we answer it in the suitable way?
Mr. Tan: 45 _________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________. The interviewer wants to know about you
and what your plans are for the present and the future.
Jack: Thank you, Mr. Tan. I think my brother will calm down with your pieces of advice.
Mr. Tan: You're welcome.
VIII. Use the words or phrases given to write meaningful sentences about qualities of an effective
engineer.
46. effective engineer / have / ability / communicate / both / writing / speaking
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. engineers / need / pay attention / details / so that / they / not / ignore / important things
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. they / need / ability / work / team / and / gain experience / team working
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. good engineer / the ability / think critically / analyze options / and / offer / solutions / problems
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. engineers / need / leadership skills / when / they / decisions / and / influence / other people /
project
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________